AV Receiver
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
Owner’s Manual
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 131
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 132
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 90
Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
CONFIGURATIONS
103
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Updating the unit’s firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
En
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
145
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
En
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
ꢀ Remote control
ꢀ Batteries (x4)
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
*RX-A3020: AAA, LR03, UM-4
RX-A2020: AAA, R03, UM-4
Insert the batteries the right way
round.
ꢀ AM antenna
ꢀ FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region *One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.
of purchase.
ꢀ YPAO microphone
ꢀ Microphone base
(RX-A3020 only)
ꢀ Power cable
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-A3020
(U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified.
*The supplied power cable varies
depending on the region of purchase.
*Using for angle measurement
during YPAO.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
ꢀ CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual)
ꢀ Easy Setup Guide
ꢀ Safety Brochure
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
•
•
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
Accessories
En
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Wide variety of supported content
Supports 2- to 9-channel (plus rear presence) speaker
system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows
you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.
• iPod/iPhone/iPad
• USB
. p.76
. p.80
. p.83
. p.86
. p.88
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.50
• Media server (PC/NAS)
• Internet radio
• AirPlay
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
. p.64
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.68
. p.24
• Bi-amp connections, channel
expansion (with external power-amp)
and multi-zone configurations to
enhance your system
Network contents
Speakers
Audio
Audio
iPod/iPhone/iPad
USB device
HDMI Control
Audio
3D and 4K signals supported
HDMI Control
Video
Audio/Video
TV
BD/DVD player
AV receiver (the unit)
Operating external
devices with the supplied
remote control
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
The unit’s
remote control
. p.136
. p.158
TV remote control
. p.61
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Full of useful functions!
Useful tips
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.69)
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.101).
❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.68)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays
back the selected source with the least circuitry, which
lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.118).
BD/DVD
player
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
❑ Easy operation with a TV screen
You can navigate through different types of content
(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or
easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.122).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
CD player
Game
console
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
❑ Low power consumption
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption (p.130).
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian and Chinese (p.49).
Camcorder
❑ Backlight illumination
I want to update the firmware...
TV
remote control
The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate
the remote control even in a dark home theater room.
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.135). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.144).
Turntable
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following
pages.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.35)
When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
• Input settings (p.103)
• Scene settings (p.106)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings
(p.109)
• Various function settings (p.112)
HDMI Control
TV audio
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.131)
• System settings (p.133)
Video from
external device
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CINEMA DSP
Optimizing speaker settings
for the environment (YPAO)
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these
experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires for more than 20 years, and
this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
The included YPAO microphone can be used to analyze
the environment so that this information can be used to
automatically adjust various settings for the speakers and
the sound field. This allows the distinctive character of the
content you are hearing to be maximized, and optimizes
the effectiveness of Yamaha's sound field generating
technology for your specific listening environment.
What is a sound field?
CINEMA DSP/CINEMA DSP 3D
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not
only as the sounds that are heard directly but also as
the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been
reflected by the walls or ceiling of the building. The
character of the reflected and reverberant sound is
affected by the shape, size, and material of the building,
and all of these sounds taken together are what give us
the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of
acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound fields of
concert halls and performance spaces around the
world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this data to be applied to
create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of
sound programs using CINEMA DSP.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the
content of the playback source such as movies, music,
or games, you can maximize the acoustical
effectiveness of that specific content. (For example, a
sound program designed for movies can give you the
sensation of actually being in that scene.)
In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses
3-dimensional sound field data that includes the axis of
height, generating an even more realistic sound field
with a spatial sense.
YPAO-R.S.C.
In rooms that have not been designed or constructed
with acoustics in mind, reflections from the walls or
ceiling can cause problems such as a blurred
low-frequency range or a smearing of the acoustical
image. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only
the unwanted reflections that can be difficult to avoid in
a typical home. This corrects the tonal changes and
inconsistencies in the sound field that can occur due to
speaker placement, thus creating a listening
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is
what we call the “sound field”.
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field
environment comparable to that of a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
CINEMA DSP HD3
Level
“CINEMA DSP HD³” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field
playback technology that takes full advantage of the
massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the
sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker
output, it delivers more than twice as much capability for
generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA
DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability,
delivering an utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Compensation
Time
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
Angle measurement
Capability for reproducing reflections
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
The direction (angle) of the front
speakers, surround speakers,
and presence speakers as seen
from the listening position is
measured, and compensation
is applied to the sound field in
order to maximize the
effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP sound field.
CINEMA DSP HD³
CINEMA DSP 3D
Microphone base
Time
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unrivaled audio and video quality
High-resolution music enhancer
Expandable to meet diverse needs
Support for bi-amp connections and
external power amp expansion
Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.90) allows you to play back
different input sources in the room where the unit is
installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can
be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz content such as from a
CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening
of the musicality in the original content (p.101)
To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front
speakers that support power amp expansion, or
expand your system by adding an external power amp
(such as a Hi-Fi amp).
(The following shows examples of use.)
Before processing
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration”
(p.24).
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)
While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living
room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a
different room.
The best expandability in Yamaha
By connecting an external power amp,
you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP
- an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
Frequency
(Example)
External power amp
After processing
Study room
(such as Zone2)
Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal
Living room (main zone)
Enjoying videos using a TV in
another room (HDMI connection)
Frequency
While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living
room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via
HDMI on a TV in a different room.
High-quality video processing
From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc)
images, any content can be played back as a
high-quality image (p.119).
• High-performance I/P conversion, high-performance
scaling
Kitchen
• Powerful noise reduction
(such as Zone4)
• Resolution enhancement adds more detail
Living room (main zone)
The RX-A3020 can also apply fine touches such as
noise reduction and resolution enhancement.
FEATURES
➤
What you can do with the unit
En
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part names and functions
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
INPUT
6
7
8
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.11)
Opening the front panel door
• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.122)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.123)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.124)
• An iPod is being charged (p.76)
3 Front display
Displays information (p.12).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.68).
6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Inside of the front panel door
9
0
AB
C
D E
F
GH
I J
K
L
(RX-A3020)
ON SCREEN
OPTION
TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
SCENE
INFO
FM
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
TUNING
ENTER
ZONE 2
ZONE
3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
YPAO MIC
USB
SILENT CINEMA
5V
2.1A
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
M
N
O
P
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
G MULTI ZONE keys
O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
ZONE 2–4
(ZONE 4: RX-A3020 only)
Enables/disables the audio output to
each zone (p.95).
0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game
consoles (p.44).
ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone that is controlled by
the keys and knobs on the front panel
(p.95).
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.98).
H INFO key
B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.97).
I MEMORY key
C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.99).
Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2 or
Zone3 (p.96).
J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.69).
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.70).
L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.69).
D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.67).
M USB jack
E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.63).
(p.76).
F SCENE keys
N YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.50).
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.61).
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front display (indicators)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HD
STEREO TUNED
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT1 OUT2
PL
L C R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1
SW2 SR
3
HD
PL SBL SB SBR PR
(RX-A3020 U.S.A. model)
9
0
A B
B
C
1 HDMI
5 Information display
A SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.97).
IN
B Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
6 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
OUT1/OUT2
C Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
Z Front/rear presence speakers (L)
X Front/rear presence speakers (R)
C Subwoofer (1)
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.
7 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
2 STEREO
8 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.99) is working.
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
9 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68) is
working.
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
HD
0 CINEMA DSP indicator
(RX-A3020)
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.64) is
working. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP
HD³ is activated.
(U.S.A. model only)
Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station
signal.
3 ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 (RX-A3020 only) is
enabled (p.95).
V Subwoofer (2)
(RX-A2020)
“CINEMA DSP” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.64) is
working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D
is activated.
4 PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.96)
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear panel
1
2
3
A
B
C
D
E
(RX-A3020 U.S.A. model)
HDMI
AV
DC OUT
NETWORK
RS-232C
(
3
NET
)
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
5V
0.5A
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
TRIGGER
OUT
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
1
REMOTE
OUT IN
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
2
Y
PB
PR
IN
OUT
AV
B
2
AV
4
12V
0.1A
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(2 TV)
L
1
2
R
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
CENTER
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP1
L
AC IN
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
R
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
FRONT
R
R
L
R
L
L
EXTRA SP2
R
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.
SINGLE
1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.43).
7 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.35). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (component video)
jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.39) or for connecting to a zone
video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.92).
2 DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (RX-A3020)
3 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.45).
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.40), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.93).
B REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to a Yamaha product that supports SCENE
link playback (p.47) or for connecting to an infrared signal
receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.94).
4 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.41).
HDMI OUT 2 jack (RX-A2020)
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.40).
C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.47).
5 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.46).
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.41).
D RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.
6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(composite video/S-video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or
S-video and outputting video signals (p.39) or for connecting
to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.92).
0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.41).
E VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.48).
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(RX-A3020 U.S.A. model)
HDMI
AV
DC OUT
NETWORK
RS-232C
(
3
NET
)
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
5V
0.5A
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
TRIGGER
OUT
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
1
REMOTE
OUT IN
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
2
Y
PB
PR
IN
OUT
AV
B
2
AV
4
12V
0.1A
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(2 TV)
L
1
2
R
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
CENTER
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP1
L
AC IN
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
R
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
FRONT
R
R
L
R
L
L
EXTRA SP2
R
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.
SINGLE
F G
H
I
J
K
L
F ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.44).
I ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3020)
J PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.22) or
to an external power amplifier (p.33).
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.91), or for connecting to an
external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence
channels (p.33).
G AUDIO 1–4 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.43).
K SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.18).
ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2020)
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.91).
H MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel
output and inputting audio signals (p.46).
L AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.48).
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
1
2
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
SOURCE RECEIVER
2 SOURCE z key
Turns on/off an external device.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
SOURCE/RECEIVER key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.78).
(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program
(p.71).
3
Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is
operated with the remote control (p.138). You can operate
the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external
device when this key lights up in green.
AV
1
5
2
6
2
3
7
3
4
V-AUX
4
A PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.70).
AUDIO
RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
4
1
B TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.137).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
[ A ]
USB
[ B ]
NET
[ C ]
3 Display window
Displays remote control information.
SCENE
C VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
4 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
1
2
3
4
5
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AV 1–7 jacks
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
D MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
6
C
D
AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks
E OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.98).
PHONO
MULTI
USB
PHONO jacks
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
USB jack (on the front panel)
NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
FM/AM radio
POP-UP/MENU
7
8
F LIGHT key (RX-A3020 only)
Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10
seconds.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
E
F
NET
ENTER
9
TUNER
G DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.97).
[A], [B], [C] Change the external device to operate with the
remote control without switching the input
source.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
G
H
H Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.63).
5 SCENE keys
:
7
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.61).
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
PRESET
A
B
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.63).
MOVIE
TV
STEREO
TV CH
PURE
INPUT
MUTE
DIRECT
7 External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices (p.138).
TV VOL
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
(RX-A3020)
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Inside of the remote control cover
I Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.63).
SOURCE RECEIVER
J INFO key
K Numeric keys
AV
1
5
1
2
6
2
3
7
3
4
V-AUX
4
L ZONE key
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control
(p.95).
AUDIO
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
[ A ]
USB
[ B ]
NET
[ C ]
M PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.96).
SCENE
N HDMI OUT key
1
2
3
4
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.60).
O Radio keys
PROGRAM
MUTE
VOLUME
Operate the FM/AM radio (p.69).
MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.
FM
AM
TUN./CH
Switches to FM radio.
Switches to AM radio.
Select the radio frequency.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON SCREEN
OPTION
P SLEEP key
ENTER
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
RETURN
SUR.
DISPLAY
M
N
ENHANCER
MEMORY
PARTY
FM
HDMI OUT
AM
I
J
DECODE
Q LEVEL key
Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.117).
INFO
R SETUP key
Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.136).
O
1
2
3
TUN./ CH
4
5
6
K
L
8
7
9
SLEEP
P
Q
R
ENT
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.136).
10
0
LEVEL
SETUP
ZONE
(RX-A3020)
FEATURES
➤
Part names and functions
En 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATIONS
Basic speaker configuration (p.19)
1
Connecting speakers (p.18)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.
Advanced speaker configuration (p.24)
Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance the system.
Connect a TV to the unit.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Connecting a TV (p.35)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Connect the unit to a network.
Connecting playback devices (p.41)
Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.44)
Connecting to a network (p.45)
Connecting other devices (p.46)
Connect external devices such as recording devices.
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.49)
Select the desired on-screen menu language.
8
9
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.50)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
PREPARATIONS
➤
General setup procedure
En 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.24).
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.21).
Functions of each speaker
Ideal speaker layout
Speaker type
Front (L)
Abbr.
1
2
Function
E
R
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Front (R)
Center
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and
vocals).
1
2
3
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
Surround (L)
4
5
6
7
E
R
T
Y
Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers
also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround
back speakers are connected.
Surround (R)
9
3
9
Surround back (L)
Surround back (R)
Front presence (L)
Front presence (R)
Rear presence (L)
Rear presence (R)
Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA
DSP HD³ (RX-A3020) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2020) (p.64), the
presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in
your room.
4
5
10°~30°
10°~30°
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to
the unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the
room.
Subwoofer
9
T
Y
6
7
• We recommend using presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However,
the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no presence speakers are connected (p.64).
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
❑ 9.2+2-channel system (using both surround back and rear presence speakers)
❑ 9.2-channel system (using rear presence speakers)
E
R
E
R
1
2
1
2
9
3
9
9
3
9
4
5
4
5
T
Y
T
Y
6
7
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
❑ 9.2-channel system (using surround back speakers)
• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected sound program (p.64).
E
R
• (RX-A3020 only)
1
2
You can make an 11-channel system by using an external power amplifier (p.25).
9
3
9
4
5
6
7
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds
using the surround back speakers.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)
❑ 5.1-channel system
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying
5.1-channel contents.
❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
❑ 2.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also
use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
1
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
2
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
3
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀSPEAKERꢀIMP.
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ8ꢀMIN
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
4
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
■ Connecting speakers
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
+
–
+
–
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the
speakers.
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
Speakers to be connected
U
O
3
U
O
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
1
2
Speaker system
Power Amp
(the number of channels)
The unit (rear)
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
CENTER
Room
Speaker type
Abbr.
Assign
(p.114)
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
SPEAKERS
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP1
L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
R
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
EXTRA SP2
R
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
9
7
5
2
Front (L)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
E
R
T
Y
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Front (R)
SINGLE
Center
Surround (L)
Surround (R)
Main zone
Surround back (L)
Surround back (R)
Front presence (L)
Front presence (R)
Rear presence (L)
Rear presence (R)
c*1 c*3
c*1 c*3
Basic (default)
E
R
●
c*4
c*4
1
2
●
9
3
9
c*2
c*2
4
5
If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear
presence speakers (*2). If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back
speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4).
T
Y
6
7
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
configure the “SWFR Layout” setting (p.116) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC
wall outlet.
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.33).
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the
unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire
to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
c
+
FR
ONT
+ (red)
b
a
d
– (black)
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
+
FR
ONT
a
Banana plug
b
❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Audio pin cable
PRE OUT
(
S
INGLE
)
(
FR
ONT
)
1
2
R
RU
N
D
S
UR
.
B
AC
K
(
REAR
OOF
S
)
ER
UB
W
CENTER
CENTER
FR
O
NT
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.19), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Combining with an external
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
power amplifier (Hi-Fi
amplifier, etc.) to build an
extended system
Bi-amp connection
Power-amp channel expansion
Multi-zone configuration
(Example)
(Example)
(Example)
External power
amplifier
Bi-amp
connection
Zone2
Main zone
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■ Available speaker configurations
(RX-A3020)
Main zone
Bi-amp
Speaker configuration
Multi-zone
Power Amp Assign (p.114)
Page
Output channel
(max)
External power
amplifier (required)
Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone
7
9
c
c
7ch BI-AMP
26
26
Front presence
7ch BI-AMP +FP
Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and power-amp channel
expansion (for presence channels)
Front presence
Rear presence
11
c
7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP
27
11
11
Rear Presence
Front
9ch +RP
27
28
9ch +FRONT
Using power-amp channel expansion (for front and/or presence
channels)
Front presence
Rear presence
11
7ch +FP+RP
28
9
7
7
9
7
Front
Front
+1 room
+2 rooms
+1 room
+1 room
+2 rooms
7ch +FRONT+1ZONE
5ch +FRONT+2ZONE
7ch +1ZONE
29
29
30
30
31
Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and
multi-zone speakers
Using multi-zone speakers
9ch +1ZONE
7ch +2ZONE
(RX-A2020)
Main zone
Bi-amp
c
Speaker configuration
Multi-zone
Power Amp Assign (p.114)
Page
Output channel
(max)
External power
amplifier (required)
Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone
7
9
7
7
9
7
7ch BI-AMP
7ch +FRONT+1ZONE
5ch +FRONT+2ZONE
7ch +1ZONE
26
29
29
30
30
31
Front
Front
+1 room
+2 rooms
+1 room
+1 room
+2 rooms
Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and
multi-zone speakers
Using multi-zone speakers
9ch +1ZONE
7ch +2ZONE
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.114)
in the “Setup” menu.
• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the
EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to
the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks. The following explanation is based
on the assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 7ch BI-AMP
Bi-amp
Bi-amp
E
R
via external amp
via external amp
1
2
1
2
3
3
9
9
9
9
4
5
4
5
6
7
6
7
Speaker
12
3
Connect to
Speaker
Connect to
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
(not used)
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
(not used)
(not used)
SUBWOOFER 1–2
SUBWOOFER 1–2
• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an
external amplifier for Zone2 (p.91).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (RX-A3020 only)
Bi-amp
E
via external amp
1
R
E
R
via external amp
2
1
2
3
3
9
9
9
9
4
5
4
5
T
Y
T
Y
via
via
via
via
external amp
external amp
external amp
6
7
external amp
6
7
Speaker
12
3
Connect to
Speaker
12
3
Connect to
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
CENTER
FRONT
CENTER
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
EXTRA SP 1
F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
SUBWOOFER 1–2
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
SUBWOOFER 1–2
• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting
external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.91).
• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an
external amplifier for Zone3 (p.91).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 9ch +FRONT (RX-A3020 only)
❑ 7ch +FP+RP (RX-A3020 only)
via external amp
E
R
E
via external amp
1
R
via external amp
1
2
2
3
3
9
9
9
4
9
4
5
5
T
Y
T
Y
via
via
external amp
6
7
external amp
6
7
Speaker
12
Connect to
Speaker
12
3
Connect to
FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
FRONT
3
CENTER
CENTER
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
EXTRA SP 1
SURROUND BACK
F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
SUBWOOFER 1–2
EXTRA SP 2
SUBWOOFER 1–2
• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an
external amplifier for Zone3 (p.91).
• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting
external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.91).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE
❑ 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE
via external amp
via external amp
E
R
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
9
3
9
9
3
9
4
5
4
5
Zone2
6
7
6
7
1
2
Zone3
Main zone
Main zone
Zone3
Speaker
12
Connect to
Speaker
12
Connect to
FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
EXTRA SP 1
(not used)
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
(not used)
(not used)
SUBWOOFER 1–2
EXTRA SP 2
SUBWOOFER 1–2
EXTRA SP 1
EXTRA SP 2
Zone3 speakers
Zone2 speakers
Zone3 speakers
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 7ch +1ZONE
❑ 9ch +1ZONE
E
1
R
1
9
2
1
2
2
1
2
3
9
9
3
9
4
5
4
5
6
7
6
7
Zone2
Zone3
Main zone
Main zone
Speaker
12
3
Connect to
Speaker
12
3
Connect to
FRONT
FRONT
CENTER
CENTER
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
EXTRA SP 1
SURROUND BACK
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
SUBWOOFER 1–2
EXTRA SP 2
SUBWOOFER 1–2
EXTRA SP 1
Zone3 speakers
Zone2 speakers
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.95), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ 7ch +2ZONE
1
2
1
2
9
3
9
4
5
Zone2
6
7
1
2
Main zone
Zone3
Speaker
12
Connect to
FRONT
3
CENTER
45
67
ER
TY
9
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
(not used)
(not used)
SUBWOOFER 1–2
EXTRA SP 1
Zone2 speakers
Zone3 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.95), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections
■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals.
To utilize the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.114) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC
wall outlet.
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.114) in the
“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP1
L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP1
R
L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
R
L
R
EXTRA SP2
EXTRA SP2
R
SINGLE
SINGLE
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
3
Zone2
Zone3
9
9
Main zone
4
5
• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign”
(p.114) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is
assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks.
6
7
• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.91).
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(Example)
■ Connecting an external power amplifier
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker
output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
RS-232C
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
Main input jack
TRIGGER
OUT
Caution
1
REMOTE
OUT IN
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
2
PB
PR
IN
OUT
MAIN IN
PR
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
T
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
1
2
L
L
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
3
/
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
CENTER
NSE
R
R
SPEAKERS
/CE/
AC IN
E
2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
CENTER
FRONT
L
R
L
EXTRA SP2
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
FRONT
SUR
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of
the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to
the pre-main amplifier.
(such as A-S2000)
The unit (rear)
HDMI
AV
RS-232C
AV
2
AV
3
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
/DVD)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
TRIGGER
OUT
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
1
REMOTE
OUT IN
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
2
Y
PB
PR
IN
OUT
2
AV
12V
0.1A
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
1
2
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
CENTER
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
SPEAKERS
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP1
L
AC IN
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
R
L
R
L
EXTRA SP2
R
SINGLE
The unit (rear)
1 23 45
6
1 F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3020 only)
Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power
Amp Assign” setting (p.114).
About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
• With unbalanced inputs
2 R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3020 only)
Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power
Amp Assign” setting (p.114).
• Output power: about 100 W (6 to 8 Ω)
3 FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
4 SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
5 SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect
the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
6 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting speakers
En 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input/output jacks and cables
■ Video/audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
1
AV
HDMI cable
Digital optical cable
Component video cable
COMPONEN
1
AV
A
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ S VIDEO jack
Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)
and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video
cable.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.
Digital coaxial cable
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.
S-video cable
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable.
Stereo pin cable
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
Video pin cable
AV
1
PREPARATIONS
➤
Input/output jacks and cables
En 34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
■
Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.122) in the “Setup” menu.
Yes
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
■ Connection Method 1 (p.35)
HDMI OUT 1 jack
No
HDMI OUT
1
2
The unit (rear)
ARC
(E OUT)
HDMI
Yes
Does your TV support
DC OUT
NETWORK
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
(
3
NET
)
HDMOUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
1
2
HDMI Control?
(1 BD/D
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
AV
A
1
2
HDMI
ARC
No
AV
B
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
HDMI
(2 TV)
L
Yes
R
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
FRONT
L
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
■ Connection Method 3 (p.38)
SURROUND
R
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
No
TV
■ Connection Method 4 (p.39)
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.158).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.156).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
3
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
1
Configure the settings of the unit.
2
e Check the following.
a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.
b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
c Press ON SCREEN.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
ON SCREEN
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set
to “On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio
cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.37).
e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.61), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
h Press ON SCREEN.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
1
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.122) in the “Setup” menu.
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 1 jack
Configure the settings of the unit.
2
HDMI OUT
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
The unit (rear)
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
HDMOUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
1
2
(1 BD/D
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI input
ON SCREEN
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
AV
A
1
2
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
HDMI
ENTER
AV
B
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
HDMI
(2 TV)
L
R
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
CO
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
L
L
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
R
R
R
5
OPTICAL
TV
OPTICAL
O
O
AUDIO 1
Audio output
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks (digital optical or analog stereo)
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.156).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40).
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
3
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
HDMI OUT 1 jack
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
HDMI OUT
1
2
The unit (rear)
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
HDMOUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
1
2
(1 BD/D
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI input
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
AV
A
1
2
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
HDMI
AV
B
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
HDMI
(2 TV)
L
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
R
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
C
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
L
L
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
R
This completes the necessary settings.
R
R
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
5
OPTICAL
TV
OPTICAL
O
O
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
AUDIO 1
Audio output
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks (digital optical or analog stereo)
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.61), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.156).
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.61), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable)
■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following
connections.
MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
The unit (rear)
S
Video input (S-video)
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
5V
0.5A
S VIDEO
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
AV
A
1
2
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog
Conversion” setting in the “Setup” menu. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.156).
S
AV
B
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
R
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIA
L
L
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.61), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
R
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
R
R
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
TV
5
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
O
O
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
The unit (rear)
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO 1
Audio output
P
R
B
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks (digital optical or analog stereo)
P
HDMI OUT
AV
1
1
2
Y
(1 BD/DV
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
AV
A
1
2
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
Video input
IN
AV
B
(component video)
AV
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(2 TV)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
V
Y
PB
PR
P
R
B
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
The unit (rear)
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CE
R
R
L
R
L
EXTRA SP2
P
Y
Video input (S-video)
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
5V
0.5A
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
VIDEO
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
SINGLE
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
AV
A
1
2
V
L
L
AV
B
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
(2 TV)
L
R
R
R
AUDIO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
R
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIA
TV
5
OPTICAL
L
L
R
OPTICAL
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
R
R
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
O
O
TV
5
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
OPTICAL
O
O
AUDIO 1
Audio output
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks (digital optical or analog stereo)
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.60).
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI OUT
1
2
The unit (rear)
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
TV
HDMI
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
HDMOUT
5V
0.5A
AV
2
1
1
(1 BD/D
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
AV
A
1
2
AV
B
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
(2 TV)
L
R
HDMI
FRONT
L
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
HDMI input
HDMI
SURROUND
R
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
Projector
TV (already connected)
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• (RX-A3020 only)
If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor
(p.93).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting a TV
En 40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback device connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3 Connecting playback devices
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
• Connecting an iPod (p.76)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.80)
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Video
Audio
Digital optical
Digital coaxial
Analog stereo
AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
Component video
AV 1–4
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI.
The unit (rear)
Y
PB
PR
PR
PB
Y
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.127) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ,
D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
H
1
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
Video output
(component video)
AV
B
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.101) in the “Option” menu.
AV
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT
(2 TV)
L
R
Y
PB
PR
PR
PB
Y
ZONE
2
/
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
F.PRESENSE
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
R
R
L
ANA
I)
The unit (rear)
HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
C
C
SINGLE
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
HDMI
AV
Video device
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
2
O
O
(1 BD/DVD)
UT)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
TRIG
OU
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
L
REMOTE
OUT IN
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
2
Y
PB
PR
IN
OUT
HDMI output
L
L
AV
12V
HDMI
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
1
2
R
HDMI
R
R
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
HDMI
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
CENTER
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
SPEAKERS
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
R
URROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
R
L
L
EXTRA SP2
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
SINGLE
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Video device
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback device connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■ S-video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Audio
Video
Audio
Digital coaxial
Digital optical
Analog stereo
AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL)
AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)
Digital coaxial
Digital optical
Analog stereo
AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
S-video
Composite video
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks
AV 1–4
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
(
3
NET
)
5V
0.5A
(S VIDEO) jacks
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV O
AV OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
(1 BD/DVD)
Video output
(S-video)
V
Video output
(composite video)
S
L
L
R
R
VIDEO
S
V
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
S VIDEO
ANNA(4
ANNA(
RADIO)
RADIO)
C
C
O
C
C
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
Video device
Video device
O
O
O
L
L
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
R
R
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback device connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
PHONO jacks
PHONO
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
Audio output
(PHONO)
GND
GND
Ground lead
The unit
(rear)
PHONO
L
L
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.127) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL
(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
DC OUT
L
L
HDMI OUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
1
2
(1 BD/D
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
R
R
PHONO
GND
AV
RMONITOR
R
UT
OUT/
(1 BD/
Y
PB
E OUT
Turntable
AV
A
1
2
AV
B
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.101) in the “Option” menu.
(2 TV)
L
R
FRONT
L
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
Audio output jacks on audio device
Audio output jacks on the unit
SURROUND
R
AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
Digital optical
FM
75Ω
C
O
C
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
COAXIAL
Digital coaxial
Audio device
O
OPTICAL
AV 1–4 (AUDIO)
L
Analog stereo
AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)
L
L
Turntable (PHONO)
PHONO
R
R
R
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4
Audio output
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks (any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting playback devices
En 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback device connections
FM/AM antenna connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect devices such as game consoles and
camcorders to the unit.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
• The supplied antennas and the location of the antenna jacks vary depending on the region of
purchase.
The unit (front)
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
FM
AM
TUNING
ENTER
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
ZONE CONTROL
RETURN
DISPLAY
FM antenna
AM antenna
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
YPAO MIC
USB
SILENT CINEMA
5V
2.1A
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
HDMI
V
L
R
O
DC OUT
NETWORK
HDMI
AV
(
3
NET
)
HDMI OUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
AV
5
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
P
R
Y
AV
3
4
P
B
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
AV
B
AV
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SI
(2 TV)
L
R
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
R
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
R
R
L
L
EXTRA SP2
Game console
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
SINGLE
The unit (rear)
Camcorder
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control on
the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the
unit.
• You need to prepare a cable that match the output jacks on your device.
• If you connect video devices to both the HDMI IN jack and analog video/audio jacks, the unit outputs
video/audio input through the HDMI IN jack.
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output
from the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT jacks.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting the FM/AM antennas
En 44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM antenna connections
Network connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Assembling the AM antenna
5 Connecting to a network
(U.S.A. model)
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Internet
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
WAN
LAN
PC
Modem
(Other models)
Router
Network cable
DC OUT
NETWORK
HDMI
AV
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
(
3
NET
)
HDMI OUT
5V
0.5A
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
4
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
MO
Y
AV
B
AV
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
(2 TV)
L
R
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENS
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
ZONE
R
2
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
R
R
L
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
The unit (rear)
75Ω
Connecting the AM antenna
Hold down
Insert
Release
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.123).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting to a network
En 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output
6 Connecting other devices
You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an
SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Connecting recording devices
The unit (rear)
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output video/audio signals selected as the input.
ORK
(
3
NET
)
HDMI OUT
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
P
C
D
AV
A
1
2
AV
B
AV
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks.
CENTER
ZON
(2 TV)
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
ZON
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
F.PRES
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
R
L
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
Channel output
(Center)
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ENNA(4
Radio
RADIO)
AM
VIDEO
The unit (rear)
AV OUT
V
V
(Subwoofer)
DC OUT
NETWORK
(
3
NET
)
5V
0.5A
S VIDEO
PHONO
GND
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
AV OUT
M
(1 BD/DVD)
S
S
(Surround
back)
L
MULTI CH
INPUT jacks
AUDIO
(2
L
AUDIO
L
L
L
R
L
R
Device with analog
multi-channel output
Video/audio
recording device
1
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICA
(Surround)
(Front)
R
R
R
R
L
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
FM
75Ω
OPTICAL
O
O
R
If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,
the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using
“Video Out” (p.104) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are
not available.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting other devices
En 46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connecting a device that supports
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
SCENE link playback (remote connection)
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.
If you have a Yamaha product that supports SCENE control signal transmission, you
can operate it remotely by connecting it to one of the REMOTE OUT jacks, using a
monaural mini-jack cable, and linking with the SCENE function (p.61).
TRIGGER OUT
1–2 jacks
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
REMOTE OUT jack
TRIGGER
OUT
HDMI
AV
RS-2
AV
3
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
REMOTE
OUT
AV
6
AV
7
1
1
2
TRI
O
PR
C
D
IN
IN
OUT
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
OUT IN
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
2
Y
PB
PR
IN
OUT
1
REMOTE
OUT IN
1
2
OUT
12V
2
2
R
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
1
2
12V
0.1A
12V
0.1A
LE)
(FRONT)
1
2
System connection
input
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
ER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
CENTER
Remote input
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
SPEAKERS
ZONE 2/ZONE
BI–AMP
3
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
K
CENTER
FRONT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
L
R
L
R
L
EXTR
CK
CENTER
EXTRA SP2
R
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP1
R
L
AC IN
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
REMOTE
IN
NGLE
Yamaha product
(such as a DVD player)
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
• If you connect a Yamaha product that supports the SCENE link playback function to one of the REMOTE
OUT jacks, you can remotely start playback on it by linking with a scene selection (p.61). To enable the
SCENE link playback function, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.106) in the “Scene” menu.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.128) in the
“Setup” menu.
• You can also connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to operate the unit and external devices from
another room (p.94).
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting other devices
En 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power cable connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
RS-232C
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
TRIGGER
OUT
220V-
240V
1
REMOTE
OUT IN
OUT
PR
1
2
IN
OUT
110V-
120V
2
12V
0.1A
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
1
2
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
CENTER
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP1
L
AC IN
RESENCE
L
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
R
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
RS-232C
AV
6
AV
7
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
OUT IN
1
2
OUT
2
12V
0.1A
LE)
(FRONT)
1
2
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CK
CENTER
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP
EXTRA SP1
L
AC IN
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
R
To an AC wall outlet
PREPARATIONS
➤
Connecting the power cable
En 48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SOURCE RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese.
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
6
7
V-AUX
DI
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1
2
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Press ON SCREEN.
3
4
ON SCREEN
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
5
PREPARATIONS
➤
Selecting an on-screen menu language
En 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SOURCE RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
5
V-AUX
DI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
YPAO MIC
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
jack
The unit (front)
YPAO MIC
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
E
R
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
2
3
9
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
1
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.
YPAO
microphone
4
5
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
3
Ear height
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.
(The microphone direction is not
considered.)
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
VOLUME
9
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
According to your speaker configuration, configure
the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.114) in the
“Setup” menu.
4
For the basic speaker configuration (p.19): set to “Basic”
(default).
For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.24): set
to the appropriate setting.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Settings
The following screen appears on the TV.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions
in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to
suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure).
Yes
V-AUX
DI
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
No (default)
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
If desired, select the measuring options.
6
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Single measure
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.51) or “Angle”
(p.52) (RX-A3020 only) and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
d
e
a
bac
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.52)
❑ Multi Position
Selects multi measure or single measure.
Multi measure
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back)
b
a
d
c
d
c
e
a
b
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
❑ Angle
(RX-A3020 only)
SOURCE RECEIVER
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
Enables/disables the angle measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
V-AUX
DI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 5 minutes).
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.58) or “Warning messages” (p.59).
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
1
Settings
Enables the angle measurement. The unit will measure
angle of each speaker at the listening position and
correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP
can create more effective sound fields.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Yes
RETURN
No (default) Disables the angle measurement.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
(RX-A2020)
(RX-A3020 [when angle measurement is disabled])
Proceed to Step 3.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
(RX-A3020 [when angle measurement is enabled])
SOURCE RECEIVER
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
Proceed to Step 2.
V-AUX
DI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
Perform the angle measurement.
2
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle
measurement finishes.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position and
set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”.
Microphone
base
FRONT
DIRECTION
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
3
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.56).
• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement
finishes.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SOURCE RECEIVER
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
4
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
V-AUX
DI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.58) or “Warning messages” (p.59).
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
1
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
5
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
2
Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SOURCE RECEIVER
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
Perform the angle measurement.
3
4
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position you
will be seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to
the position “1”.
V-AUX
DI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
(RX-A2020)
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
(RX-A3020 [when angle measurement is disabled])
Proceed to Step 5.
Microphone
base
FRONT
DIRECTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
(RX-A3020 [when angle measurement is enabled])
• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement
finishes.
Proceed to Step 4.
c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle
measurement finishes.
V-AUX
DI
Checking the measurement results
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
1
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
press ENTER.
5
6
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
The following screen appears.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.56).
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
1
2
3
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
7
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SOURCE RECEIVER
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
2
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
Polarity of each speaker
Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the
correct polarity (+/-).
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Wiring
Size
V-AUX
DI
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.111).
1
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
2
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance
Level
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Output level adjustment for each speaker
ON SCREEN
ON SCREEN
(RX-A3020 only)
Angle of each speaker at the listening position
Angle
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
3
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message
Cause
Remedy
E-1: No Front SP
E-2: No Sur. SP
E-3: No F.PRNS SP
Front speakers are not detected.
One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-4: SBR → SBL
E-5: Noisy
A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-6: Check Sur.
E-7: No MIC
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-8: No Signal
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
E-9: User Cancel
The measurement has been canceled.
An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-10: Internal Error
E-11: No R.PRNS SP
One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic speaker setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message
W-1: Out of Phase
Cause
Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.56) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.56) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80
ft) of the listening position.
W-2: Over Distance
W-3: Level Error
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as
possible.
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
PREPARATIONS
➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
Selecting an HDMI output jack
Input selection keys
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
1
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
1
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
2
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
MUTE
VOLUME
VOLUME
DOCK
TAG
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
3
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE
HDMIꢀOUTꢀSel.
ꢀꢀꢀOUTꢀ1+2
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
ON SCREEN
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
OUT 1+2
OUT 1
OUT 2
Off
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.69)
• Playing back iPod music (p.76)
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
HDMI OUT
TUN./ CH
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.80)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.83)
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.61).
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.86)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.88)
• (RX-A3020 only)
If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.127), you can turn on/off
each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
4
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.99).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
PLAYBACK
➤
Basic playback procedure
En 60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
V-AUX
DI
Press SCENE.
1
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
SCENE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Input
1 (BD/DVD)
AV 1
2 (TV)
AUDIO 1
Auto
3 (NET)
NET RADIO
—
4 (RADIO)
TUNER
—
ON SCREEN
Input (p.60)
ON SCREEN
Audio Select (p.101)
HDMI Output (p.60)
Sound Program (p.63)
Enhancer (p.68)
Auto
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
HDMI Output
OUT 1+2
Sci-Fi
Auto
OUT 1+2
STRAIGHT
Auto
OUT 1+2
9ch Stereo
Auto
OUT 1+2
9ch Stereo
Auto
Mode
Off
On
On
On
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.101)
On
On
On
On
• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.105).
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
En 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Configuring scene assignments
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
1
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.107) in the “Scene” menu.
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.
Input selection keys
Sound
Tone Control, Adaptive DRC
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
2
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround
SCENE
Surround
SCENE
1
2
3
4
DOCK
TAG
Video
Video Mode, Video Adjustment
Master Volume
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀꢀꢀꢀSCENE1
ꢀSETꢀComplete
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Volume
3
HD
Lipsync
Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
3
Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the
display window on the remote control.
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.137) to register it.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI or of a Yamaha product connected to the
REMOTE OUT jack. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in
“Device Control” (p.106) in the “Scene” menu.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
En 62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Selecting the sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
V-AUX
DI
b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
ENTER.
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
• MOVIE THEATER category (p.65):
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
decoder and press ENTER.
• ENTERTAINMENT category (p.65):
Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly.
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
ON SCREEN
playback
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.108).
ON SCREEN
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• CLASSICAL category (p.66):
Press CLASSICAL repeatedly.
ENTER
Cursor keys
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.131).
• STEREO category (p.66):
Press STEREO repeatedly.
LIVE
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
STRAIGHT
CLUB
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
MOVIE
V
STEREO
PURE
Selecting a surround decoder (p.67)
DIRECT
Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
STEREO
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
Switching to the straight decode mode (p.67)
Press STRAIGHT.
Switching to the Pure Direct mode (p.68)
Press PURE DIRECT.
SUR.DECODE
ENHANCER
Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68)
Press ENHANCER.
TUN./ CH
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Enjoying surround sound with
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D)
headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
* CINEMA DSP HD³: RX-A3020, CINEMA DSP 3D: RX-A2020
Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA
DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural
stereoscopic sound fields.
Sound program category
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀMUSIC
ꢀꢀCLASSICAL
HallꢀinꢀVienna
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” (RX-A3020) or “CINEMA DSP n” (RX-A2020) lights up
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.99) in the
“Option” menu to “Off”.
• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full
effect of the stereoscopic sound fields (and rear presence speakers for further
spatial sounds). However, even when no front presence speakers are connected,
the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit creates the surround sound field
using the front-side speakers.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Sports
❑ MOVIE THEATER
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Standard
Action Game
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Roleplaying Game of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Music Video
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the
reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as
providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage.
The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall
effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will
not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
Adventure
Recital/Opera
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Drama
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Mono Movie
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ LIVE/CLUB
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low
ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in
the center.
Village Vanguard
Warehouse Loft
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the
concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.
❑ CLASSICAL
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
Cellar Club
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
Hall in Munich
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Roxy Theatre
The Bottom Line
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
Hall in Vienna
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
producing a very full, rich sound.
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Hall in Amsterdam
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
❑ STEREO
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a
pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
Church in Freiburg high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial
reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
2ch Stereo
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
Church in
Royaumont
of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the
9ch Stereo
outskirts of Paris.
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Chamber
• CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D (p.64) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.64) do not work when “2ch
Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
Enjoying unprocessed playback
multichannel (surround decoder)
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
V-AUX
DI
■ Playing back in original channels
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.153).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
(straight decode)
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
1
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀSUR.ꢀDECODE
ꢀꢀꢀProꢀLogic
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
Press STRAIGHT.
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
1
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPro Logic
bPLIIx Movie
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
ꢀꢀꢀSTRAIGHT
VOLUME
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
L
SL SW1
SBL
C
R
SR
SBR
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.
STRAIGHT
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.100) in the “Option” menu to
a setting other than “Off”.
STRAIGHT
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
SUR.DECODE
TUN./ CH
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
V-AUX
DI
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Press PURE DIRECT.
1
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)
when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.101) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”
(default).
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀPUREꢀDIRECT
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Press ENHANCER.
1
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
– Using the multi-zone function
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀEnhancerꢀOn
– Output from the AV OUT jacks
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
HD
“ENHANCER” lights up
PURE
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.101) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
ENHANCER
TUN./ CH
PLAYBACK
➤
Selecting the sound mode
En 68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Listening to FM/AM radio
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
Selecting a frequency for reception
V-AUX
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
1
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
source.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
TUNER
Press FM or AM to select a band.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
2
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ87.50MHz
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Setting the frequency steps
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
3
TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Set the unit to standby mode.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
1
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
2
FM
AM
DOCK
TAG
press MAIN ZONE z.
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ98.50MHz
TUN./CH
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Numeric keys
3
HD
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
PROGRAM
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ
STEP”.
3
• (U.S.A. model only)
You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “Audio Mode” (p.102) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the
monaural reception mode.)
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
TUNERꢀFRQꢀSTEP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFM50/AM9
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
SLEEP
3
HD
• (Except for U.S.A. model)
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.102) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
4
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Selecting a preset station
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
1
source.
V-AUX
DI
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
2
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD
Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.73, p.75).
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
TUNER
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀPreset
01:FMꢀ98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.69)
3
HD
1
to tune into the desired radio station.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• (U.S.A. model only)
To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.71)
after tuning into the radio station.
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
2
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.73, p.75).
PRESET
PRESET
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
Preset number
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀPreset
01:FMꢀ98.50MHz
ꢀꢀPresetꢀOK
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
MEMORY
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
TUN./ CH
Numeric keys
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀPreset
02:Empty
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program
You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD
Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).
HD Radio™ tuning
(U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM
radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting
provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and
reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental
program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio
programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further
information on HD Radio Technology, visit
Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio
program.
You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)
directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select
program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).
1
V-AUX
DI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀHDꢀ2/3
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ88.9MHz3
ꢀꢀꢀWXYZ-FM
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating
CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM
broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data
(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)
from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information
You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.
MODE
Press INFO.
1
MODE
Each time you press the key, the item switches.
Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience
of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,
HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.
z
DOCK
TAG
Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.
These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as
deep cuts into traditional genre.
HD
z
Info
ꢀꢀꢀCategory
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio
stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s
FM and FM sounds like a CD.
z
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.
DOCK
TAG
HD
FMꢀ88.9-1 ꢀꢀꢀWXYZ-FM
When tuning into an HD Radio station
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Relative/total program number
(when multiple programs are available)
3
HD
RhythmꢀandꢀBlu
Station Info
Category
Frequency, station name (call sign)
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀHDꢀ1/3
INFO
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ88.9MHz1
ꢀꢀꢀWXYZ-FM
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Station name (call sign), program category
Station name (call sign), artist name/song title
Station name (call sign), album title
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
TUN./CH
HD
Artist/Song
Album
Numeric keys
ENT
“HD” lights up
Absolute program number
(when multiple programs are available)
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
Frequency, sound program selected on the unit
Frequency, decoder selected on the unit
• The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If
you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down
TUN./CH, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.
• When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.102), you can tune into the
analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.
• Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station
or period of time.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program
number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program
category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Holding HD Radio™ information display
You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the
TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function.
When the desired HD Radio information is
1
V-AUX
DI
displayed, press OPTION.
3 HD indicator
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold”
(Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER.
TUNER
2
4 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
The current information will remain displayed until
“Hold/Unhold” is selected again.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
OPTION
OPTION
• The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode
or if another input source or another radio station is selected.
Menu
Submenu
FM
Function
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Switches to FM/AM.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
3
RETURN
AM
Tuning (+/-)
Auto (+/-)
Selects a frequency.
■ Operating HD Radio™ on the TV
You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on
the TV.
Selects a radio station automatically.
Manual Tuning
Selects an audio program (when
Program (+/-) multiple audio programs are
available).
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
1
Registers the selected station as
Memory
presets.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Direct
Enters a frequency directly.
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
❑ Playback screen
Browse
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
1
2
3
4
5
Screen Off
1 HOLD indicator
Flashes when the hold function (p.72) is enabled.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
1
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
V-AUX
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
2
■
Displaying the Radio Data System information
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
1
2 Preset number
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.75).
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Press INFO.
2
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
Menu
Submenu
Function
INFO
TAG
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
TUN./ CH
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
Info
ꢀProgramꢀType
Memory
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Automatically registers HD Radio
(FM/AM) stations and FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Item name
Auto Preset
Clear Preset
Utility
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Frequency (always displayed)
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
DOCK
TAG
1 Page Up
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ꢀꢀꢀFMꢀ98.50MHz
ꢀꢀꢀCLASSICS
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Moves to the previous/next page of the
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
list.
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
1 Page Down
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Information
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
Program Service Program service name
Program Type
Radio Text
Current program type
Information on the current program
Current time
Clock Time
• If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1
(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,
register it manually (p.70).
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
Sound mode name
Decoder name
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Operating the radio on the TV
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
V-AUX
• (U.S.A. model only)
See “Operating HD Radio™ on the TV” (p.72) to operate the radio on the TV.
■ Receiving traffic information
DI
automatically
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
TUNER
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
1
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
1
■ Playback screen
OPTION
OPTION
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
2
ENTER
3
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
1
2
RETURN
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
4
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
DOCK
TAG
HD
Finished
TrafficProgram
TPꢀFM101.30MHz
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.73), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Traffic information station (frequency)
2 Band icon
(Except for U.K. and Europe models)
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
3 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Menu
Submenu
FM
Function
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Switches to FM/AM.
AM
1
Tuning (+/-)
Auto (+/-)
Selects a frequency.
V-AUX
DI
Manual Tuning
Selects a radio station automatically.
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Registers the selected station as
presets.
Memory
Direct
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
2
Enters a frequency directly.
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Browse
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu
Submenu
Function
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Memory
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Auto Preset
Clear Preset
Utility
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to FM/AM radio
En 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back iPod music
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
1
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To
select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.78).
Supported iPod (as of April 2012)
• iPod touch, iPod nano (2nd gen. to 6th gen.)
• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
• iPad2, iPad
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
2
The unit (front)
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
PHONES
YPAO MIC
USB
SILENT
5V
2.1A
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀUSB
ꢀꢀConnected
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
1
2
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
3
V-AUX
DI
5
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
1
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
NET
USB
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
4
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.79) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
4 Item number/total
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
2
Menu
Function
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.78).
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Playback screen
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1
2
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
1
V-AUX
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
DI
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
2
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.79) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
Operational remote control
Function
keys
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Cursor keys
ENTER
Select an item.
Confirms the selection.
Returns to the previous screen.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
RETURN
RETURN
MODE
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
a
d
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
External device
operation keys
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
MODE
s
Stops playback.
External device
operation keys
Menu
Submenu Function
f
g
h
j
Skips forward/backward.
a
s
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
d
Stops playback temporarily.
Play Control
f
g
h
j
Skips forward/backward.
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
V-AUX
DI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
1
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
2
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
OPTION
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
RETURN
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
Item
Setting
Function
MODE
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
Plays back songs in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Songs (Songs)
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
One (One)
Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v”
appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
4
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iPod music
En 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
V-AUX
DI
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
NET
USB
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
and 48 kHz for other files.
Playback of USB storage device contents
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
Connecting a USB storage device
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
1
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
1
The unit (front)
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
PHONES
YPAO MIC
USB
SILENT
5V
2.1A
USB
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
USB storage device
DOCK
TAG
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀUSB
ꢀꢀConnected
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En 80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
2
1
2
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
3
V-AUX
DI
5
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
4
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.82) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
RETURN
RETURN
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Function
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Playback screen
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
2
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
1
V-AUX
DI
OPTION.
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
2
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.82) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
OPTION
OPTION
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Item
Setting
Function
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
RETURN
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
External device
operation keys
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
On (On)
Menu
Submenu
a
Function
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
One (One)
s
Repeat
(Repeat)
“c” appears on the TV screen.
Play Control
d
Stops playback temporarily.
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
All (All)
f
g
Skips forward/backward.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
4
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En 82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
V-AUX
DI
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.45). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
1
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
and 48 kHz for other files.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
1
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
2
In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.
2
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
3
1
2
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
3
V-AUX
DI
5
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
4
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.85) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
RETURN
RETURN
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Function
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
Now Playing
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Playback screen
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
2
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
1
V-AUX
DI
press OPTION.
3
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
2
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.85) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
OPTION
OPTION
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Item
Setting
Function
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
RETURN
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
External device
operation keys
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
On (On)
Menu
Submenu
a
Function
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
One (One)
s
Repeat
(Repeat)
“c” appears on the TV screen.
Play Control
d
Stops playback temporarily.
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
All (All)
f
g
Skips forward/backward.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
4
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.105).
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
1
2
V-AUX
DI
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.45). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to Internet radio
En 86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Browse screen
■ Playback screen
1
2
1
2
3
V-AUX
DI
3
5
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
4
1 Playback indicator
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Operation menu
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
External device
operation keys
Menu
Submenu
Function
Play Control
Browse
s
Stops playback.
Menu
Function
Moves to the browse screen.
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Screen Off
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
Returns to the higher-level list.
Moves to the playback screen.
• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to
stop playback.
Now Playing
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Screen Off
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this
feature, you need the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create
your personal account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in
“Network” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
PLAYBACK
➤
Listening to Internet radio
En 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.
iTunes
PC
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
1
Router
The unit
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
(
) appears.
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod
iTunes (example)
iPod (example)
Playback starts
iPod
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.45). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.132) in the “Information”
menu.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.
2
3
• iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac)
• iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later
iTunes (example)
iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
En 88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Menu
Submenu
a
Function
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback temporarily.
d
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu.
Play Control
f
g
V-AUX
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
Skips forward/backward.
DI
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.104) in the “Input”
menu to “Off”.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Screen Off
• To start AirPlay playback when AirPlay from another device is ongoing, first stop
the current playback.
Caution
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
the remote control to control playback.
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
■ Playback screen
RETURN
iTunes (example of English version)
External device
operation keys
1
2
3
1 Playback indicator
Check this box
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
En 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input
sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in
other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).
■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms
You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main
zone), another person can listen to PC music in the study room
(Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room (Zone3)
and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
Video (ZONE
OUT or HDMI)
• The Zone4 function is available on RX-A3020 only.
• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.157).
Audio
(SPEAKERS or
ZONE OUT)
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone
configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best
meet your requirements.
Guest room
(Zone2 or Zone3)
Living room (main zone)
Multi-zone configuration examples
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.92
TV (for digital video playback [RX-A3020 only]): p.93
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.91
■ Enjoying music in other rooms
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
❑
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV (RX-A3020 only)
Audio
(SPEAKERS or
ZONE OUT)
Video/audio
(HDMI)
Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)
Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.91
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.93
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit
with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external
amplifier.
Preparing the multi zone system
Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.
Caution
The unit (rear)
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting
speakers or an external amplifier.
HDMI
DMI OUT
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV
5
AV
6
2
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or
come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit
or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will
appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
ZONE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
(ZONE OUT)
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
AV
A
1
2
MONITOR OUT/
Y
PB
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
AV
B
AV
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
R
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRON
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The
connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used
(the unit or an external amplifier).
SPEAK
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/
R
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
R
R
L
EXTRA
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
SINGLE
L
❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier
R
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with
speaker cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2/3 speakers”
(p.32).
AUDIO
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
• (RX-A3020 only)
You cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
amplifier for Zone2 or Zone3 depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting
(p.114) in the “Setup” menu.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connecting a video monitor to play back
ZONE OUT jacks
(any of COMPONENT VIDEO,
VIDEO, S VIDEO)
analog videos
Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or
Zone3. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video
monitor, choose one of the video connection methods.
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
Video input
(any of component video,
composite video, S-video)
P
R
P
B
HD
Y
A
1
ARC
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
UT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
PB
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
AV
A
1
2
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
IN
• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for
multi-zone video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the
zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same
way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the
DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component
video cable.
P
R
B
AV
B
D
AV
P
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(2 TV)
Y
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
OUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
SPEAKERS
V
VIDEO
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
R
SURROUND BACK
CE
R
L
L
EXTRA SP2
V
S
• (RX-A3020 only)
On-screen operations are not available for Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”.
SINGLE
S VIDEO
S
The unit (rear)
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor
for Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) in the “Setup”
menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to
play back videos/audio
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can
enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio
Output” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
(RX-A3020 only)
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back
videos/audio at Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you
can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone4).
• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.32).
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the
following operations is performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to
connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.41).
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected
to the unit.
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone4.
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
The unit (rear)
OUT
HDMI
2
ETWORK
(
3
NET
)
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 B
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI
HDMI
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
PB
4
AV
A
1
2
AV
B
AV
AUDIO
1
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
3
AUDIO
4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
(2 TV)
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFE
AXIAL
3
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
5
OPTICAL
6
COAXIAL
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
R
R
ANTENNA(4
HD Radio
RADIO)
AM
SIN
Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
Main zone
Zone4
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set
“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
■ Operating the unit from another room
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using
Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit
does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
(remote connection)
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3
or Zone4 using the supplied remote control if you connect an
infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT 1 or
REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.136).
OUT
OUT
REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks
The unit (rear)
Infrared signal
receiver
HDMI
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
7
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
MPONENT VIDEO
PR
TRIG
O
Y
AV
3
4
PB
PR
C
D
REMOTE
OUT IN
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
2
REMOTE
Y
PB
PR
IN
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
AV
12V
ULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT (SINGLE)
(FRONT)
1
2
Remote control
ZONE
2
/
ZONE
3
/
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
ROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
CENTER
F.PRESENSE R.PRESENSE
SPEAKERS
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
R
L
R
L
EXTRA SP2
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
SINGLE
Infrared
signal
receiver
Infrared signal
transmitter
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
RECEIVER z
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
4
Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone.
1
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated
switches.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
Input selection keys
Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected)
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.69)
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• Playing back iPod music (p.76)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.80)
RECEIVER
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.83)
Press RECEIVER z.
2
• Listening to Internet radio (p.86)
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled
or disabled.
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.88)
When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding
zone indicator lights up in the front display.
• You can also use the web control to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. For
details on the web control function, refer to “Supplement for Web Control” on
the CD-ROM.
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is
ongoing in the main zone.
TUN./ CH
Caution
• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,
see “Multi-zone output” (p.157).
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4.
ZONE
• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
Zone4
rooms (party mode)
The following functions are also available when the zone you want
to operate is enabled.
The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same
music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party
mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.
Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as
background music for a house party.
V-AUX
Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
SCENE
Press PARTY.
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Press SCENE.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
MUTE
VOLUME
VOLUME
MUTE
• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
Setting the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).
• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode
Set” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu.
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
PARTY
• (RX-A3020 only)
Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main
zone.
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
TUN./ CH
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
SLEEP
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB steps)
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
PLAYBACK
➤
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En 96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Viewing the current status
Switching information on the front display
Input source group Item
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
V-AUX
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name)
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Press INFO.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
1
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
* During simple playback of iPod:
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
DOCK
TAG
HD
Info
AudioꢀDecoder
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name)
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
NET RADIO
3
HD
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
Viewing the status information on the TV
DOCK
TAG
HD
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Press DISPLAY.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀAV1
ꢀꢀꢀProꢀLogic
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
1
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
The following information is displayed on the TV.
Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status
Input source/
INFO
Information
TUN./ CH
Party mode
status
Volume
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
Input source group Item
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name)
Audio format/
Decoder
Sound
mode
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name)
CINEMA DSP status
* (U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned
into an HD Radio station (p.71).
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
TUNER
2
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.73).
PLAYBACK
➤
Viewing the current status
En 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Press OPTION.
1
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
DOCK
TAG
HD
Option
ToneꢀControl
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Item
Function
Page
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
99
Front display
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
Adaptive DRC
(Adaptive DRC)
99
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
99
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.
100
100
100
100
101
101
Dialogue Adjust
(Dialog Adjust)
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Extended Surround
(EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used.
TV screen
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
2
Subwoofer
Trim (SW.Trim)
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
3
4
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital
audio).
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
101
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Video Mode
(Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
101
101
101
Video Adjustment
(Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets.
Audio Select
(Audio Select)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM
radio reception.
Audio Mode
(Audio Mode)
102
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Item
Function
Page
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
102
(U.S.A. model only)
Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is
tuned into an HD Radio station.
Settings
Hold/Unhold
(Hold/Unhold)
72
74
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
station.
Off (Off) (default)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.79),
USB storage device (p.82), or media server (p.85).
—
—
Volume: low
Volume: high
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.79),
USB storage device (p.82), or media server (p.85).
On
On
Off
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Off
Input level
Input level
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)
Setting range
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³ (RX-A3020) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2020)
(p.64). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D functions with
the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo).
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
Default
Bypass (Bypass)
Settings
On (On) (default)
Off (Off)
Enables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D.
Disables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D.
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)
■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you
can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Settings
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
Auto (Auto)
(default)
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
Setting range
0 to 3
Default
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)
0
❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this
setting.
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)
Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
EX/ES (EX/ES)
Off (Off)
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the
signal in 5.1-channel.)
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence
speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.64) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
• Some early Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back
channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back
those sources.
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Default
0
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Ideal position
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
■ Video Mode (Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Settings
Default
0.0 dB
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
(Processing)
Direct (Direct)
Disables the video signal processing.
(default)
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
■ Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment”
(p.120) in the “Setup” menu.
❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.68).
Settings
1 to 6
Settings
Off (Off)
On (On)
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
■ Audio Select (Audio Select)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for
one input source.
Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
Auto (Auto) (default)
❑ Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this
function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio
(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
Settings
Coax/Opt
(Coax/Opt)
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or
OPTICAL jack.
Off (Off)
Disables the high-resolution mode.
Enables the high-resolution mode.
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when
Analog (Analog)
On (On) (default)
no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode)
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.
• This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).
Settings
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the
Auto (Auto) (default)
Mono (Mono)
signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.
• HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Stereo (Stereo)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
(default)
Mono (Mono)
Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
PLAYBACK
➤
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En 102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
3
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Item
Function
Page
104
Rename/Icon Select
Decoder Mode
Changes the input source name and icon.
Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.
104
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
Volume Interlock
Video Out
104
104
105
The input source of the unit also changes.
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
DMC Control
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
En 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH
Input sources
■ Setup procedure
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
Settings
1
Auto (default)
DTS
Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
Off
Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).
Limited (default)
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
Full
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
4
■ Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Input sources
TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Off
Does not output video.
AV 1–7, V-AUX
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Default
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
USB: V-AUX
Others: Off
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
5
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
6
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
En 104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.61) using the TV screen.
Input source
SERVER
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Settings
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
Disable
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default)
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Load
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
6
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
❑ Device Control
Scene menu items
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to
the unit via HDMI or on a Yamaha product connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.
(SCENE link playback)
Item
Function
Page
Save
Registers the current settings in the selected scene.
106
Settings
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
currently assigned to the selected scene.
Off
Disables the SCENE link playback function.
Load
106
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
HDMI Control
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
Changes the scene name and icon.
107
107
Restores the default settings for the selected scene.
Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this
if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.
IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1
■ Save
Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this
IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 2 if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack
and “IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1” does not work properly.
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.
Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this
IR: Yamaha CD
if a Yamaha CD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.62).
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.158).
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Detail
■ Rename/Icon Select
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
1
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with
low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and
include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).
Check or uncheck
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
Choices
Input
Input (p.60), Audio Select (p.101)
HDMI Output (p.60)
HDMI Output
Sound Program (p.63), Pure Direct Mode (p.119), Enhancer (p.68),
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.101)
Mode
Sound
Tone Control (p.99), Adaptive DRC (p.99)
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.99), Dialogue Lift (p.100), Dialogue Level
Surround
Video
Master Volume (p.60)
Volume
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.118), Delay (p.118)
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern (p.114), PEQ Select (p.117)
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
4
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.61) for the selected scene.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (Sound Program menu)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
3
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound Program menu items
Item
Function
Settings
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
Reverb Delay
• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround
decoder.
0% to 100%
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Reverb Level
■ Settings for sound programs
Item
Function
Settings
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo”.
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII
Sound program Item
Function
Settings
Decode Type
Movie), Neo:6 Cinema
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
2ch Stereo
Direct
Auto (default), Off
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Level
Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
Surround Initial Delay
1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Adjusts the right and left
volume balance.
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Left / Right Balance
Surround Back Initial
Delay
9ch Stereo
0 to 10 (default: 5)
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
Room Size
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
front presence speakers do
not produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
0.1 to 2.0
Adjust the height volume
balance using the front
presence speakers.
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Height Balance
Monaural Mix
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Liveness
Off (default), On
0 to 10
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
• Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Time
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type
Item
Function
Settings
Off (default), On
Select “On” to wrap front right/left
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Panorama
0 to 7 (default: 3)
bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Center Width
Dimension
-3 to +3 (default: 0)
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
Neo:6 Music
Center Image
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
6
Press ON SCREEN.
1
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
4
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu items
Menu
Item
Function
Page
50
Auto Setup
Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Selects a speaker system.
Setting Pattern
114
114
114
115
115
115
115
116
116
Setting Data Copy
Power Amp Assign
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected.
Surround
Surround Back
Front Presence
Rear Presence
Speaker
Configuration
Manual Setup
Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.
116
SWFR Layout
Extra Bass
Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
116
116
116
117
117
117
118
118
118
118
118
119
119
119
119
119
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Distance
Level
Parametric EQ
Test Tone
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Enables/disables the test tone output.
Delay Enable
Auto/Manual Select
Adjustment
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Lipsync
Dynamic Range
Max Volume
Sound
Initial Volume
Pure Direct Mode
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).
Adaptive DSP Level
Analog to Analog Conversion
Video Mode
Video
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu
HDMI
Item
Function
Page
122
122
123
123
124
124
124
125
125
125
125
126
126
126
126
126
126
HDMI Control
Audio Output
Standby Through
IP Address
Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).
Selects a device to output audio.
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Network Standby
MAC Address Filter
Network Name
Main Zone Set Zone Rename
Volume
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Network
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone.
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Initial Volume
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Mono
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used.
Multi Zone
Zone Rename
Zone Scene Rename
Zone Rename
Zone4 Set
(RX-A3020 only)
Monitor Out Assign
HDMI OUT2 Assign
(RX-A3020 only)
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
127
Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone.
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
127
127
128
128
128
128
129
129
130
130
130
Input Assignment
Dimmer (Front Display)
Display Set
Short Message
Wall Paper
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Function
Trigger Mode
Target Zone
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Memory Guard
Auto Power Down
ECO Mode
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
ECO
Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to
2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power
amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.
Settings
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to
Basic (default)
9-channel plus rear presence speakers) (p.19).
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and
Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers (p.30).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks
(default: Zone2).
7ch +1ZONE
■ Setting Pattern
Select this when you use 9-channel speakers in the main zone and
Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.30).
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
9ch +1ZONE
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone3).
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone, plus
Zone2 and Zone3 speakers (p.31).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks
(default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
7ch +2ZONE
(RX-A3020 only)
9ch +RP
Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus rear presence
channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.27).
• Distance
• Level
(RX-A3020 only)
9ch +FRONT
7ch +FP+RP
Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus front channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.28).
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1 (default), Pattern2
(RX-A3020 only)
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers, plus front presence and
rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.28).
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers plus front channel
expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone and Zone3 (or
Zone2) speakers (p.29).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone3).
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens.
7ch
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
+FRONT+1ZONE
Select this when you use 5-channel speakers plus front channel
expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone, plus Zone2
and Zone3 speakers (p.29).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks
(default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).
■ Setting Data Copy
5ch
+FRONT+2ZONE
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Choices
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front
speakers) (p.26).
7ch BI-AMP
Pattern1 > 2
Pattern2 > 1
Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Surround
(RX-A3020 only)
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front
speakers) plus front presence channel expansion using an external
amplifier (p.26).
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
7ch BI-AMP +FP
7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP
Settings
(RX-A3020 only)
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front
speakers), plus front presence and rear presence channel expansion
using an external amplifier (p.27).
Large
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small (default)
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
None
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
❑ Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
❑ Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
Settings
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
Large x1
Large x2
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small (default)
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small x1
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small x2 (default)
None
❑ Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Settings
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Large
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small (default)
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Front Presence
❑ SWFR Layout
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
Settings
Settings
Use (default)
None
Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right
Left + Right
Front + Rear
sides of the room.
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear
sides of the room.
❑ Rear Presence
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected.
Monaural x2
(default)
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
Settings
Use
Select this option when rear presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
None (default)
❑ Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
Settings
❑ Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
Off (default)
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
On
low-frequency components.
Settings
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the
Normal
(default)
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
• This setting is not available when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”, or when “Front”
is set to “Small”.
Use
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
■ Distance
Reverse
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and
“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
None
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Default
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.50) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset band and the cursor keys (q/w) to
adjust the gain.
4
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting while viewing the front display
a Press LEVEL.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker.
c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
5
6
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Manual
YPAO:Flat
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Front
YPAO:Natural
Through
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Does not use the equalizer.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.50). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
Settings
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
Off (default)
On
Does not output test tones.
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
1
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
3
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Adjustment
Sound
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Configures the audio output settings.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Default
❑ Delay Enable
0 ms
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1–7, AUDIO 1–4
• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment
and fine adjustment.
Settings
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Disable
Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable (default)
Settings
❑ Auto/Manual Select
Maximum (default)
Standard
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
Minimum/Auto
unit via HDMI.
Auto (default)
Manual
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Initial Volume
Video
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Configures the video output settings.
Settings
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
Off (default)
On
standby mode.
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5
dB increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.68).
Settings
■ Analog to Analog Conversion
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from
Enables/disables the video conversion (p.156) between the analog video jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO).
the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with
Auto (default)
the wall paper is displayed.
Settings
Video Off
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
Off
Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.
Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.
Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks
only.
On (default)
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
• This function works only when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) is set to “Main” (default) and “HDMI OUT2
Assign” (RX-A3020 only) (p.127) is set to “Main” (default) or “Zone4”.
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.
On (default)
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
• Only 480i/576i-resolution video signals can be output from the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks (p.156).
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments).
Settings
Direct (default)
Processing
Disables the video signal processing.
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Resolution
❑ Adjustment
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can
register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).
Settings
■ Setup procedure
Through
Does not convert the resolution.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.
1
2
Auto (default)
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
• Conversion into 4K signals is available only when both “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) and “HDMI OUT2
Assign” (RX-A3020 only) (p.127) are set to “Main” (default).
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.134) in the
your TV normally.)
❑ Aspect
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
3
4
“Processing”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Settings
Contrast Enhancement
Selects whether to automatically enhance the video contrast.
Through (default)
16:9 Normal
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
Settings
Off (default)
Auto
Does not enhance the video contrast.
Adjusts 4:3 video signals to fit a 16:9 TV. (The edges of video images
may be distorted.)
Smart Zoom
Enhances the video contrast automatically.
Resolution Enhancement
Selects whether to enhance the video resolution.
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or
2160p (4K) signals.
Settings
Off (default)
Auto
Does not enhance the video resolution.
Enhances the video resolution automatically.
(RX-A3020 only)
Adjusts the video resolution settings manually.
Configure the settings in “Detail Enhancement” and “Edge
Enhancement”.
Manual
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Detail Enhancement
Block NR
(RX-A3020 only)
(RX-A3020 only)
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details manually when “Resolution
Enhancement” is set to “Manual”.
Selects the effect of the block noise reduction when “Noise Reduction (NR)” is set to
“Manual”. Block noise is a block-shaped distortion that often appears during playback
of low bit-rate videos.
Setting range
0 to 50
Settings
Default
0
Off (default)
Does not use the block noise reduction.
Low, Medium, High Reduces block noises according to the selected effect level.
Edge Enhancement
Temporal NR
(RX-A3020 only)
(RX-A3020 only)
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges manually when “Resolution
Enhancement” is set to “Manual”.
Selects the effect of the temporal noise (film-grain noise and random noise of analog
video signals) reduction when “Noise Reduction (NR)” is set to “Manual”.
Setting range
0 to 50
Settings
Default
Off (default)
Does not use the temporal noise reduction.
0
Low, Medium, High Reduces temporal noises according to the selected effect level.
Noise Reduction (NR)
Selects whether to use the noise reduction functions.
Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Settings
Setting range
-100 to +100
Off (default)
Auto
Does not use the noise reduction functions.
Reduces the video noises automatically.
Default
0
(RX-A3020 only)
Selects noise types and noise reduction effects manually.
Configure the settings in “Mosquito NR”, “Block NR” and “Temporal
NR”.
Manual
Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.
Setting range
-100 to +100
Mosquito NR
(RX-A3020 only)
Default
0
Selects the effect of the mosquito noise reduction when “Noise Reduction (NR)” is set to
“Manual”. Mosquito noise is a distortion that comes out at the video edges.
Saturation
Settings
Adjusts the video saturation.
Off (default)
Does not use the mosquito noise reduction.
Setting range
-100 to +100
Low, Medium, High Reduces mosquito noises according to the selected effect level.
Default
0
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.35) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Configures the HDMI settings.
Settings
Off
Disables ARC.
Enables ARC.
On (default)
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
❑ Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.158).
Settings
Settings
Off
On
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Off (default)
On
Disables HDMI Control.
Enables HDMI Control.
Sync”.
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Auto (default)
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.158) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑ TV Audio Input
• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
• (RX-A3020 only)
The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) is set to “Main”.
❑ Amp
Settings
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to
the unit.
AUDIO 1–4
Default
Settings
AUDIO 1
Off
Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
On (default)
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Network
Configures the network settings.
Settings
Off (default)
On
Disables the audio output from the TV.
Enables the audio output from the TV.
• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby
mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
❑ DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
Off (default)
On
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
Settings
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
Off
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
On (default)
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
■ Manual network settings
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
1
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
IP Address
Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS Server (P)
DNS Server (S)
Specifies a subnet mask.
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
3
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
4
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
6
7
■ Procedure
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
1
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
Settings
entry.
Off (default)
On
Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
❑ Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Off (default)
On
Disables the MAC address filter.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
3
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
4
❑ MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”
and press ENTER.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
2
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
4
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
6
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
❑ Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the
volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Settings
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Variable (default)
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
• This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.114).
❑ Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Setting range
■ Procedure
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
1
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
❑ Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
Off (default)
mode.
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
On
increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
3
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
4
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Mono
■ Zone4 Set
(RX-A3020 only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Configures the Zone4 settings.
Settings
Off (default)
On
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
❑ Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the scene names in the same manner as “Zone Scene Rename” in
“Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set” (p.126).
❑ Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Procedure
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.125).
Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO,
S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
3
entry.
Settings
Main (default), Zone2, Zone3
• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
4
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
5
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.125).
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Function
(RX-A3020 only)
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main (default), Zone2, Zone4
• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.157).
❑ Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2
Assign” is set to “Zone2”.
On
Enables the audio output.
■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
Off (default)
Disables the audio output (video output only).
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.96) for each zone.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”
Choice
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.
1
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4 (RX-A3020 only)
Settings
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
Enable (default)
Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.
2
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
3
• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
❑ Trigger Mode
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
❑ Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Power (default)
zone specified with “Target Zone”.
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source”.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Source
Default
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.
Manual
0
Source
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.130) is set to “On”.
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching
when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
❑ Short Message
Choices
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment).
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Settings
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
On (default)
Off
Low
source specified in this option.
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High (default)
❑ Wall Paper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of
the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Settings
Picture 1 (default),
Picture 2, Picture 3
Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Choices
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
Transmits the electronic signal.
High (default)
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❑ Target Zone
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
Off (default)
On
Does not protect the settings.
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Zone2
Icon
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone3.
Zone3
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
(RX-A3020 only)
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone4.
Zone4
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.
All (default)
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ ECO Mode
ECO
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
Configures the power supply settings.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
Off (default)
On
Disables the eco mode.
Enables the eco mode.
• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
■ Auto Power Down
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
Settings
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerDown” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
English (default)
English
Japanese
French
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
German
Spanish
Russian
Chinese
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Types of information
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
■ Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
Format
Audio format of the input signal
Press ON SCREEN.
1
2
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
Channel
Input
Sampling
Bitrate
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
The speaker terminals from which signals are output
Dialogue
Output
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
3
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
HDMI Signal
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Analog Resolution
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
Interface
TV interface
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu)
En 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Network
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Displays the network information on the unit.
IP Address
IP address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS Server (P)
DNS Server (S)
MAC Address
Network Name
Status
Subnet mask
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
The IP address of the default gateway
The IP address of the primary DNS server
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC address
Set the unit to standby mode.
1
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.124)
The connection status of the NETWORK jack
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
PROGRAM
Remote ID
TV Format
The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.133)
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
3
4
5
(Asia and General models only)
Tuner Freq. Step
System ID
System ID number
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
Firmware Version
The new settings take effect.
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware” (p.144).
■ Zone
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 (RX-A3020 only).
Input
The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
The volume for Zone2 or Zone3
Volume
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Item
Function
Page
133
DOCK
TAG
SPEAKER IMP.
REMOTE SENSOR
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- REMOTEꢀSENSOR
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
133
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀON
REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
133
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
(Asia and General models only)
TUNER FRQ STEP
134
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
Settings
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type.
134
134
ON (default)
OFF
Turns on the remote control sensor.
Turns off the remote control sensor.
MONITOR CHECK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
from the backup.
RECOV./BACKUP
135
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
INITIALIZE
FIRM UPDATE
VERSION
Restores the default settings.
135
135
135
Updates the firmware.
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- REMOTEꢀCONꢀAMP
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀID1
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀSPEAKERꢀIMP.
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ8ꢀMIN
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
Settings
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
Press SETUP.
1
2
6 Ω MIN
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER.
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
8 Ω MIN (default)
ꢀPRESET
Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER.
3
4
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
ꢀꢀ5020
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
5
6
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display
window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from step 3.
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- MONITORꢀCHECK
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀYES
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
• The registered remote control codes (p.136) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.120) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
Settings
(Asia and General models only)
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
YES (default)
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
TUNERꢀFRQꢀSTEP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFM50/AM9
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SKIP
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
SLEEP
3
HD
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
Settings
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 (default)
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀꢀTVꢀFORMAT
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀNTSC
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
DOCK
TAG
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- RECOV./BACKUP
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀFIRMꢀUPDATE
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
3
HD
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀBACKUP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀUSB
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
1
■ Firmware update procedure
Choices
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
1
RECOVERY
Choices
Note
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
Update the firmware via the network.
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
NETWORK
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.144).
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀꢀINITIALIZE
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀCANCEL
DOCK
TAG
SPꢀIMP.ꢀ- ꢀꢀꢀVERSION
Restores the default settings for the unit.
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
IN OUT
1
OUT
2
PL
L
C
R
PR
ENHANCER SLEEP
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Choices
3
HD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀx.xx
VIDEO
ALL
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Does not perform an initialization.
CANCEL
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Controlling external devices with the remote control
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
Registering remote control codes
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to
V-AUX
DI
■
Registering the remote control code for a TV
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
Press SETUP.
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
1
ꢀSETUP
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.137). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
• If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control
automatically exits from the setup menu.
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.
1
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER.
2
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
Item name
Press SETUP.
2
ꢀPRESET
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
TV z
Item
Function
Page
Assigns a function to each key by learning the code
from other remote controls.
LEARN
138
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.
3
Registers the remote control code for external
devices.
PRESET
RENAME
MACRO
136
139
140
Edits the device names or scene names displayed
on the remote control’s display window.
ꢀPRESET
Programs macro operations (sequence of control
commands).
TUN./ CH
Press TV z and press ENTER.
4
CLEAR
ERASE
Clears the remote control configurations.
142
143
“----” (empty) or code currently registered
Erases a function assigned to each key by learning.
SETUP
Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the
authorized custom installers only.
EX-IR
—
ꢀꢀ----
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control code and press ENTER.
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.
5
6
1
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.
Input selection keys
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
Press SETUP.
2
3
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
❑ TV operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.
INPUT
MUTE
Switches the video inputs of the TV.
Mutes the audio output of the TV.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
TV operation keys
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
ꢀPRESET
TV CH
Switch the channels of the TV.
Turns on/off the TV.
TV z
Press a corresponding input selection key and
press ENTER.
4
5
TV
INPUT
MUTE
■ Registering the remote control codes for
For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for
the playback device connected to the AV1 jack.
TV VOL
TV CH
TV operation keys
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
Code currently registered
ꢀꢀ5098
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control and press ENTER.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
TUN./ CH
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.
Numeric keys
• If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A], [B]
or [C] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching
the input source after pressing the key.
If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.
SETUP
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE/RECEIVER
To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4
and 5.
6
7
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
V-AUX
Programming from other remote controls
(learning)
DI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.62).
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals
from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control
playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work
after you register the remote control code, use the learning function
to assign a function to each key.
❑ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
External device
operation keys
Press SETUP.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
1
• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in
orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when
ENTER
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MODE
External device
operation keys
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and
press ENTER.
2
TV
SOURCE z
Turns on/off the playback device.
Select an item.
INPUT
MUTE
Cursor keys
ENTER
TV VOL
TV CH
Menu operation
keys
TV operation keys
ꢀLEARN
Confirms a selected item.
Returns to the previous screen.
Switches information on the display.
Switches between modes.
Displays the top menu.
TV z
RETURN
DISPLAY
MODE
Press one of the following keys depending on the
type of your device.
3
TOP MENU
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is
connected).
POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
s
d
Stops playback.
Stops playback temporarily.
For TV: press TV z.
TUN./ CH
External device
operation keys
Starts playback of the selected
song/video.
a
Numeric keys
h
j
f
g
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
SETUP
Skips forward/backward.
Numeric keys
Enter numerical values.
Control the TV (p.137).
TV operation keys
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Note
RECEIVER z
Press ENTER.
4
5
• If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external
receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or
numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If
you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following
steps.
Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls
at each other.
a Press SETUP.
Remote control of external device
Input selection keys
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER.
d Press RECEIVER z.
SCENE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display.
f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
External device
operation keys
Editing device names
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the
remote control’s display window.
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
Perform the following steps (a and b) within
DISPLAY
6
MODE
10 seconds.
Press SETUP.
1
External device
operation keys
a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
assign a function.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,
DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys
TV
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
For TV: TV operation keys
TV operation keys
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and
press ENTER.
2
TV z
b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is
learned until “OK” appears in the display window.
If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4.
ꢀRENAME
Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are
learned.
7
8
Press one of the following keys to select a device or
a scene.
3
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
TUN./ CH
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected).
Numeric keys
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be
decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display
window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the
new functions.
For TV: press TV z.
SETUP
For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z.
For scene: press one of the SCENE keys.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Operating multiple functions at once
(macro)
• To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press
ZONE to select a zone.
The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple
functions at once.
Press ENTER.
4
5
V-AUX
For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the
CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and
start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key
operation.
Use the cursor keys to rename.
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r).
SCENE
To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space,
SCENE
1
2
3
4
symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w).
■ Enabling the macro operations
ꢀBD/DVD
Press SETUP.
1
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
ENTER
Press ENTER to register the new name.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
Cursor keys
ENTER
6
Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK”
appears in the display window.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.
2
To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat
Steps 3 to 6.
7
8
TUN./ CH
ꢀMACRO
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
SETUP
ZONE
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press
ENTER.
3
ꢀꢀꢀON
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
4
“MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled)
RECEIVER
• To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
By default, the following macro operations are available after
pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are
enabled.
RECEIVER z
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and
press ENTER.
3
4
Macro operations
Macro operation key
ꢀꢀEDIT
1st command
2nd commend
Input selection keys
RECEIVER z
Turns on the unit.
(unregistered)
Selects the
Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or
input selection key) to which macro operations are
assigned and press ENTER.
corresponding input
source. (unregistered
for the [A], [B] and [C]
keys)
Input selection keys
Turns on the unit.
“MACRO 1” appears in the display window.
■ Programming macro operations
ꢀMACROꢀ1
You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each
macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro
operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out
sequentially according to the programmed remote control
commands.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to
include in the macro operations in sequence.
5
To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control,
press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
• Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control
codes (p.136) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.138).
(Example)
Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as
the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to
“AV1” and dturning on the TV
• We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume
TV z
Press SETUP.
1
a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z.
b (MACRO 2) Press AV1.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“AV1” and press SOURCE z.
d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“TV” and press TV z.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.
2
TUN./ CH
To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK”
appears on the window display.
6
7
ꢀMACRO
If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and
the setting is confirmed automatically.
SETUP
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Resetting the remote control configurations
RECEIVER z
• When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared.
You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5.
■ Clearing the remote control configurations
You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of
settings or clear all the remote control configurations.
Press a key to which the selected process is
applied.
4
Input selection keys
Press SETUP.
1
When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the
input selection key or TV z.
SCENE
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection
key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE.
When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation
key (input selection key or RECEIVER z).
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and
press ENTER.
2
Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the
window display.
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
5
6
ꢀCLEAR
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to
be cleared and press ENTER.
3
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
TV z
ꢀPRESET
Clears the functions learned from other remote
controls.
LEARN
PRESET
RENAME
MACRO
Restores the default remote control code settings.
Restores the default device name settings.
Clears the macro operation settings.
Clears all remote control configurations and
restores default settings.
RESET
TUN./ CH
“ALL” appears in the display window.
SETUP
ꢀꢀALL
To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys,
proceed to Step 5.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by
learning
You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and
restore the default key assignments.
Press SETUP.
Input selection keys
1
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and
press ENTER.
2
ꢀERASE
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
Press one of the following keys to select the device
3
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
Press ENTER.
4
5
TV z
Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on
the window display.
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.
Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key
assignments are erased.
6
TUN./ CH
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
7
SETUP
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Controlling external devices with the remote control
En 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Updating the unit’s firmware
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.132). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
V-AUX
DI
PHONO
TUNER
MULTI
USB
NET
Note
[
A
]
[
B
]
[
C
]
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
Information
icon
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.135).
ENTER
Cursor keys
ENTER
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
Message
System Icon
Read the on-screen description.
1
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.
3
The firmware update is complete.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤
Updating the unit’s firmware
En 144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.50). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.114).
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.128) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.118). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 or Zone3 (p.125).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.129).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.133).
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.125).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.158). After
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
APPENDIX
➤
Frequently asked questions
En 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power and system
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn on.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
The power does not turn off.
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
in the power supply voltage.
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.23).
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu
for the specified time.
to “Off” (p.130).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.133).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.23).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
the unit is too high.
“Off” (p.130).
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
The unit is not reacting.
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
in the power supply voltage.
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.131).
No sound.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
The maximum volume is set.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.118).
The volume cannot be increased.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.131).
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.117).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.115).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.117).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.
Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.100).
The extended surround is disabled.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.116).
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”
menu to “Use” (p.116).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.122).
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the playback device (connected to The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the unit with HDMI).
the SPEAKERS terminals.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.122).
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.122). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.127).
No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
(RX-A3020 only)
The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is
disabled.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.131). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
Move the unit further away from the device.
Noise/hum is heard.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.130).
The volume of the unit is too high.
The sound is distorted.
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or
Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
The sound is interrupted.
(RX-A3020 only)
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.93).
Video
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected on the unit.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.134).
No video.
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.131). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.159).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or
Zone4, HDMI video output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
The video is interrupted.
(RX-A3020 only)
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.93).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM radio
Problem
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
(U.S.A. model only)
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.102).
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.102).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Select the station manually (p.69).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.69).
The AM radio signal is weak.
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.
model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.70).
Auto Preset has been used.
The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.
(U.S.A. model only)
The unit is in the monaural reception mode.
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.102).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB and network
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
The unit does not detect the USB device.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.123). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.123).
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
The network feature does not function.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.83).
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
The unit does not detect the PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.83).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
The Internet radio cannot be played.
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The unit is out of the operating range.
The batteries are weak.
Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key
lights up in orange).
The remote control is set to control external devices.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.133).
Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices
(the key lights up in green).
The remote control is set to control the unit.
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
Set the remote control code again (p.136). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external
device are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate.
Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.138).
Learning is impossible in this case.
The remote control does not learn new functions.
The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not
compatible with the remote control.
Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions
(p.143).
Memory capacity is full.
APPENDIX
➤
Troubleshooting
En 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error indications on the front display
Message
Cause
Remedy
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.83).
Access denied
Access to the PC is denied.
The unit cannot access the USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
Access error
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.
Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.76).
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.45).
Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
Check SP Wires
Internal Error
No content
The speaker cables short circuit.
An internal error has occurred.
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
No device
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
RemID Mismatch
Remote Off
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.133).
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.133).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
Unable to play
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.83). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
APPENDIX
➤
Error indications on the front display
En 152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
DTS Express
Audio information
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
■ Audio decoding format
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Dolby Digital
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
FLAC
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
DTS-ES
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
HDMI and video information
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
WAV
Deep Color
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C
signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color
reproduction than the composite video signal system.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
CINEMA DSP HD³
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
m (solid line) is always available. , (dotted line)
is available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion”
(p.119) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default).
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
S VIDEO VIDEO
out out
HDMI out
COMPONENT VIDEO out
480i/ 480p/
Video device
The unit
TV
480i/ 480p/
480i/
480i/
576i
Resolution
720p 1080i 1080p
4K
720p 1080i 1080p
576i
576p
m
m
m
m
576i
576p
576i
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
HDMI in
HDMI out
1080i
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI in
1080p/
50, 60 Hz
m
m
m
m
m
m
1080p/24 Hz
4K
m
m
m
m
m
m
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
,
,
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
m
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
m
m
m
1080i
1080p
S VIDEO in
S VIDEO out
S
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
S VIDEO in 480i/576i
VIDEO in 480i/576i
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
,
,
m
,
,
m
VIDEO in
VIDEO out
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-zone output
■ RX-A3020
■ RX-A2020
❑ Audio output
❑ Audio output
Using the unit's
internal amplifier (p.32)
Using the unit's internal amplifier
p.32
Using an external amplifier
(p.91)
Using an external amplifier (p.91)
(
)
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
jacks
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
Out
EXTRA SP 1–2
jacks
ZONE OUT
jacks
Out
EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks
In
Zone2
Zone3
Zone2
Zone3
Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2)
In
Zone2
Zone3
Zone2
Zone3
Digital audio (HDMI)
m (*3)
m (*3)
m (*3)
m (*4)
Digital audio (HDMI)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m (*5)
m (*5)
m (*5)
Analog audio
(AUDIO)
Analog audio
(AUDIO)
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
USB (including iPod)
Network sources
TUNER
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
USB (including iPod)
Network sources
TUNER
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m: Available
m: Available
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)
*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
* To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2 or Zone3, connect the device to the AUDIO jacks of
the unit with a stereo pin cable.
*4 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the
main zone is selected)
*5 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
❑ Video output
❑ Video output
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6)
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)
Out
Out
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
jack (*7)
S VIDEO
Zone2/3
VIDEO
S VIDEO
Zone2/3
VIDEO
VIDEO
In
In
Zone2/3
Zone2/3
Zone2/3
Zone2/3
Zone2
Zone4
HDMI video
HDMI video
m
m
Component video
S-video
m
m
Component video
S-video
m
m
m
m
Composite video
m
m
Composite video
m
On-screen display
(browse/playback)
On-screen display
(browse/playback)
m (*8)
m (*8)
m (*8)
m
m: Available
m: Available
* To watch videos in Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
or “Zone3”.
*6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”
*7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”
*8 Not available in Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
APPENDIX
➤
Glossary
En 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Example)
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Playback starts
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.35) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.41).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
1
2
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.122) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and
“Standby Sync”).
(Example)
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
3
Playback device
also turns off
The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
4
5
6
Turn off the TV
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
Check the followings.
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.61)
If not, select the input source manually.
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.137)
APPENDIX
➤
Information on HDMI
En 158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDMI signal compatibility
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
7
Audio signals
Audio signal type
Audio signal format
Compatible media (example)
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
2ch Linear PCM
2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
Multichannel Linear PCM
8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
HD DVD
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
DSD
2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
Dolby Digital, DTS
SACD
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
Bitstream
DVD-Video
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• VGA
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
• 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
APPENDIX
➤
Information on HDMI
En 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trademarks
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network
Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
Rovi™
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
This receiver supports network connections.
APPENDIX
➤
Trademarks
En 160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
[RX-A2020]
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R)
• Audio Format
Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)
- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
- Dolby TrueHD
• Digital Audio
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)
Optical x 1 (AV OUT)
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
• Video
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX)
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
- Composite x 1
- S-video x 1
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)
- DTS
• Video
- DSD 6-ch
- Component x 1
AV OUT
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
S-video x 4 (AV 1–4)
Component x 4 (AV 1–4)
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
- Composite x 1
- S-video x 1
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
• HDMI Input
• HDMI Output
*5
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2
)
• Other
*5 [RX-A3020 only] barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
Other jacks
• REMOTE IN x 2
• REMOTE OUT x 2
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
• HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)
- Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND
*1
L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R , EXTRA SP 2
USB
*2
L/R
)
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• DC OUT x 1
*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[ZONE2, ZONE3, R.PRESENCE]
- Subwoofer Out x 2
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
HDMI
• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync,
Network
ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA
(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)
- 480i/60 Hz
[RX-A3020]
- 576i/50 Hz
- Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R*3, R.PRESENCE L/R*4
*3 Note: barter to ZONE2
- 480p/60 Hz
)
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
*4 Note: barter to ZONE3
APPENDIX
➤
Specifications
En 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[RX-A2020]
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
(20 Hz to 20 k Hz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Ω)
Front L/R..........................................................140 W+140 W
Center...........................................................................140 W
Surround L/R ................................................... 140 W+140 W
Surround Back L/R .......................................... 140 W+140 W
Front Presence L/R.......................................... 140 W+140 W
(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
[RX-A3020]
Front L/R..................................................................230 W/ch
Center .....................................................................230 W/ch
Surround L/R...........................................................230 W/ch
Surround Back L/R..................................................230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R..................................................230 W/ch
[RX-A2020]
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
Front L/R..........................................................155 W+155 W
Center...........................................................................155 W
Surround L/R ................................................... 155 W+155 W
Surround Back L/R .......................................... 155 W+155 W
Front Presence L/R.......................................... 155 W+155 W
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
Front L/R..................................................................220 W/ch
Center .....................................................................220 W/ch
Surround L/R...........................................................220 W/ch
Surround Back L/R..................................................220 W/ch
Front Presence L/R..................................................220 W/ch
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3020]
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
Front L/R..................................................................185 W/ch
Center......................................................................185 W/ch
Surround L/R ...........................................................185 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ..................................................185 W/ch
Front Presence L/R..................................................185 W/ch
(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
[RX-A3020]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)................................175/220/295/410 W
[RX-A2020]
[RX-A3020]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)................................165/210/285/405 W
(20 Hz to 20 k Hz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ..........................................................150 W+150 W
Center.......................................................................... 150 W
Surround L/R....................................................150 W+150 W
Surround Back L/R ..........................................150 W+150 W
Front Presence L/R..........................................150 W+150 W
(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω..............................................150 or more
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................230 W/ch
[RX-A2020]
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ...................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R..................................................................175 W/ch
Center......................................................................175 W/ch
Surround L/R ...........................................................175 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ..................................................175 W/ch
Front Presence L/R..................................................175 W/ch
(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
• Maximum Input Signal
Front L/R ..........................................................165 W+165 W
Center.......................................................................... 165 W
Surround L/R....................................................165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R ..........................................165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R..........................................165 W+165 W
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ...............................60 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD).........................2.4 V or more
• Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100 Ω
PRE OUT
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................220 W/ch
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE OUT............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................+0/-3 dB
APPENDIX
➤
Specifications
En 162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
AM section
• Tuning Range
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz)..........................................0 0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC
[Other models] ................................................................... PAL
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...................530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]......530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models].........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz
PHONO to AV OUT..............................................0.02% or less
MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 Ω)
.............................................................................0.04% or less
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)..................... NTSC/PAL
• Video Signal Level
General
• Power Supply
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video
PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] .................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model].............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model]....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ...86 dB or more
[Other models]....................................................81 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV)
..........................................................................100 dB or more
Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]
.....................................................................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
C (PAL) [Other models]....................................0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out)......................................150 µV or less
Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr.................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Channel Separation
• Power Consumption
PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)...60 dB/55 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
.................................................................60 dB/45 dB or more
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
[U.S.A. model].....................................................490 W/620 VA
[Canada model]..................................................400 W/510 VA
[Korea model] .................................................................390 W
[Other models]................................................................490 W
.......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off).....60 dB or more
• Volume Control
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
Main Zone.................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ........... 0.3 W (Typical)
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ........... 5.0 W (Typical)
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals)
.......................................................................... 4.2 W (Typical)
Network Standby On......................................... 2.2 W (Typical)
........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, 3 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics
FM Section
• Tuning Range
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut......................... 6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ..................... 6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
• Maximum Power Consumption
...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Asia and General models]...........................................1210 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
Bass Boost/Cut............................. 10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ........................... 10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.......................................................... 3.5 kHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
......................435 x 192 x 467 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-3/8”)
Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Weight
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
[RX-A3020]
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................72 dB/70 dB
HD [U.S.A. model]........................................................... 80 dB
[China, U.K. and Europe models]..............19.9 kg (43.9 lbs)
[Other models]...........................................18.2 kg (40.1 lbs)
[RX-A2020]....................................................17.1 kg (37.7 lbs)
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer).....................................................24 dB/oct.
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ....................... 0.3%/0.5%
HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................0.03%
• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
APPENDIX
➤
Specifications
En 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
7ch +FP+RP
Symbols
A
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114
7ch +FP+RP (speaker configuration) ...... 28
7ch +FRONT+1ZONE
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114
7ch +FRONT+1ZONE
(speaker configuration) .......................... 29
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114
7ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) ........ 26
7ch BI-AMP +FP
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 115
7ch BI-AMP +FP
(speaker configuration) .......................... 26
7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 115
7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP
(speaker configuration) .......................... 27
9.2+2-channel system
(speaker configuration) .......................... 19
9.2-channel system
(speaker configuration) .......................... 19
9ch +1ZONE
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114
9ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) ...... 30
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114
9ch +FRONT (speaker configuration) ...... 28
9ch +RP
Lock icon (o) .........................................129
bPLII Game (surround decoder) ............67
bPLII Movie (surround decoder) ............67
bPLII Music (surround decoder) ............67
bPLIIx Game (surround decoder) ..........67
bPLIIx Movie (surround decoder) ..........67
bPLIIx Music (Extended Surround) ......100
bPLIIx Music (surround decoder) ..........67
bPLIIxMo (Extended Surround) ............100
bPLIIxMu (Extended Surround) ............100
bPro Logic (surround decoder) ..............67
Access control (network device) ............ 124
Action Game (sound program) ................ 65
Adaptive DRC (Option menu) .................. 99
Adaptive DSP Level
(Sound, Setup menu) ........................... 119
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) ........ 118
Adjustment
(Video Mode, Setup menu) .................. 120
ADVANCED SETUP menu ...................... 132
ADVANCED SETUP menu items ............ 133
Adventure (sound program) ..................... 65
AirPlay ...................................................... 88
AM antenna .............................................. 44
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) .......... 122
Analog to Analog Conversion
(Video, Setup menu) ............................ 119
Angle measurement (YPAO) .............. 53, 55
Apple Composite AV Cable ..................... 76
ARC (Audio Return Channel) ................... 35
ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) ......... 122
Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) ........ 120
Audio Decoder
(front display information) ...................... 97
Audio device connection ......................... 43
Audio file format (PC/NAS) ....................... 83
Audio file format (USB storage device) .... 80
AUDIO jack .............................................. 34
Audio Mode (Option menu) .................... 102
Audio Output
(HDMI OUT2 Assign, Setup menu) ...... 127
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) ........ 122
Audio program (HD Radio) ...................... 71
Audio Return Channel (ARC) ................... 35
Numerics
2.1-channel system
(speaker configuration) ...........................20
2ch Stereo (sound program) .....................66
4K signal (video signal resolution) ..........159
5.1-channel system
(speaker configuration) ...........................20
5ch +FRONT+2ZONE
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ........114
(speaker configuration) ...........................29
(speaker configuration) ...........................20
7ch +1ZONE
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ........114
7ch +2ZONE
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ........114
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114
9ch +RP (speaker configuration) ............. 27
9ch Stereo (sound program) .................... 66
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Select (Option menu) ....................101
Audio Signal (Information menu) ............131
Auto Power Down (ECO, Setup menu) ...130
Auto/Manual Select
(Lipsync, Setup menu) ..........................118
Automatic station preset (FM radio) ..........75
Automatic station preset (HD Radio) ........73
AV OUT jacks ............................................46
Clock Time (Radio Data System) ............. 73
COAXIAL jack .......................................... 34
Component video cable ........................... 34
COMPONENT VIDEO jack ....................... 34
Compressed Music Enhancer .................. 68
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) .... 115
Contrast (Adjustment, Setup menu) ....... 121
Contrast Enhancement
Direct (Sound Program menu) ............... 109
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) ................... 153
DISPLAY key ............................................ 97
Display Set (Function, Setup menu) ....... 128
Display window (remote control) .............. 15
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) ........... 116
DMC (Digital Media Controller) .............. 105
DMC Control (Input menu) ..................... 105
DNS Server ............................................. 123
DNS Server
(Network, Information menu) ................ 132
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) ... 100
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) ....... 67
Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) .... 67
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
(surround decoder) ................................ 67
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie
(Extended Surround) ............................ 100
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
(Extended Surround) ............................ 100
Drama (sound program) .......................... 65
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) ................... 153
DSP Level (Sound Program menu) ........ 109
DSP Program
(front display information) ...................... 97
DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) ................ 67
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) ................ 100
Dynamic Range
(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 120
(subwoofer) ............................................ 50
Backup/recovery of the settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135
Banana plug ..............................................23
Battery .........................................................5
Bitrate
(Audio Signal, Information menu) .........131
Bitstream .................................................159
Block NR (Adjustment, Setup menu) ......121
Brightness (Adjustment, Setup menu) ....121
D
DC OUT jack ............................................ 13
Decode Type (Sound Program menu) ... 109
Decoder Mode (Input menu) .................. 104
Default Gateway ..................................... 123
Default Gateway
(Network, Information menu) ................ 132
Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) ..... 118
Detail (Scene menu) .............................. 107
Detail Enhancement
(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 121
Device Control (Scene menu) ................ 106
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) ........... 123
Dialogue
(Audio Signal, Information menu) ........ 131
Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) .............. 100
Dialogue Lift (Option menu) ................... 100
Dialogue normalization level .................. 131
Digital coaxial cable ................................. 34
Digital Media Controller (DMC) .............. 105
Digital optical cable ................................. 34
Dimension (Sound Program menu) ........ 110
Dimmer (Front Display)
C
Cartridge ...................................................43
Cellar Club (sound program) ....................66
Center (Configuration, Setup menu) .......115
Center Image (Sound Program menu) ....110
Center Width (Sound Program menu) .....110
Chamber (sound program) .......................66
Channel
Church in Freiburg (sound program) ........66
Church in Royaumont (sound program) ...66
CINEMA DSP 3D .......................................64
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) ....99
CINEMA DSP HD³ .....................................64
CLASSICAL
(Sound, Setup menu) ........................... 118
E
ECO (Setup menu) ................................. 130
ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) ............. 130
Edge Enhancement
(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 121
Enhancer (Option menu) ........................ 101
ENHANCER (sound mode) ...................... 68
(sound program subcategory) ................66
Clearing (remote control) ........................142
(Display Set, Setup menu) ................... 128
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENTERTAINMENT
Front display
Hold (HD Radio information) .................... 72
Hold/Unhold (Option menu) ..................... 72
(sound program subcategory) ................65
Erasing (remote control) .........................143
Error message (YPAO) ..............................58
EX/ES (Extended Surround) ....................100
Extended Surround (Option menu) .........100
External device control
(remote control) .....................................136
External device operation keys
External power amplifier connection .........33
Extra Bass
(part names and functions) .................... 12
Front display information .......................... 97
Front panel (part names and functions) ... 10
Front panel door (front panel) .................. 10
Front Presence
(Configuration, Setup menu) ................ 116
Function (Setup menu) ........................... 127
I
INFO key .................................................. 97
Information display (front display) ............ 12
Information menu ................................... 131
Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) ...... 109
Initial setting restoration
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 135
Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) ....... 119
Initial Volume
(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .... 125
INITIALIZE
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 135
Input Assignment
(Function, Setup menu) ........................ 127
Input jack assignment ............................ 127
Input menu ............................................. 103
Input menu items .................................... 103
Input selection keys (remote control) ....... 15
Input Trim (Option menu) ....................... 100
Internet radio ............................................ 86
IP Address .............................................. 123
IP Address
(Network, Information menu) ................ 132
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) ........ 123
iPad .......................................................... 76
iPhone ...................................................... 76
iPod .......................................................... 76
iPod connection ....................................... 76
iTunes ....................................................... 88
GND terminal (turntable connection) ....... 43
Ground lead (turntable connection) ......... 43
(Configuration, Setup menu) .................116
H
Hall in Amsterdam (sound program) ........ 66
Hall in Munich (sound program) .............. 66
Hall in Vienna (sound program) ............... 66
HD Radio audio program selection .......... 71
HD Radio information ............................... 71
HDMI (Setup menu) ............................... 122
HDMI cable .............................................. 34
HDMI Control ......................................... 158
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) ........ 122
HDMI jack ................................................ 34
HDMI Monitor (Information menu) .......... 131
HDMI OUT1
F
Filter
(MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) .......124
FIRM UPDATE
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135
Firmware update .....................................144
Firmware update
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135
Firmware Version
(System, Information menu) ..................132
Firmware version check
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135
FM antenna ...............................................44
FM Mode (Option menu) .........................102
Format
(Audio Signal, Information menu) .........131
Frequency step setting
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ....................69
Front (Configuration, Setup menu) ..........115
Front / Rear Balance
(Audio Output, Setup menu) ................ 123
HDMI OUT2
HDMI OUT2 Assign
(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ..................... 127
HDMI output selection ............................. 60
Height Balance
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 109
High definition audio .............................. 159
High speed HDMI cable .......................... 34
Hi-Res Mode (Option menu) .................. 101
L
Language (Setup menu) ........................ 130
Learning (remote control) ....................... 138
(Sound Program menu) .........................109
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Left / Right Balance
Microphone base ............................... 53, 55
Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) ... 109
Monaural reception mode (FM radio) ...... 69
MONITOR CHECK
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134
Monitor check
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134
Monitor Out Assign
(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ..................... 126
(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .... 126
Mono Movie (sound program) .................. 65
Mosquito NR
(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 121
MOVIE (sound program category) ........... 65
MOVIE THEATER
(sound program subcategory) ............... 65
MULTI CH INPUT jacks ............................ 46
Multi measurement (YPAO) ...................... 54
Multi Zone (Setup menu) ........................ 125
Multi-zone ................................................. 90
Multi-zone output ................................... 157
MUSIC (sound program category) ........... 66
Music Video (sound program) ................. 65
MUTE key ................................................. 15
Muting ...................................................... 60
Network Name
(Network, Information menu) ................ 132
Network Name
(Network, Setup menu) ........................ 124
Network Standby
(Network, Setup menu) ........................ 124
Noise Reduction
(Sound Program menu) .........................109
Level (Sound Program menu) .................109
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) .................117
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) ..................154
LIGHT key .................................................15
Lipsync ....................................................154
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) ................118
LIVE/CLUB
Liveness (Sound Program menu) ...........109
Load (Scene menu) ................................106
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) ..................154
(NR) (Adjustment, Setup menu) ........... 121
Numeric keys (remote control) ................. 16
O
ON SCREEN key ...................................... 15
On-screen menu ...................................... 15
OPTICAL jack ........................................... 34
OPTION key ............................................. 98
Option menu ............................................. 98
Option menu items ................................... 98
M
MAC Address
(MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) .......124
MAC Address
(Network, Information menu) .................132
MAC Address Filter
(Network, Setup menu) .........................124
Macro (remote control) ...........................140
Main Zone Set
(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ......................125
Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) ....114
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) ........70
Mass storage class device .......................80
Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) .........118
(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .....125
Measurement result (YPAO) .....................56
Media sharing setup .................................83
Memory Guard
(Function, Setup menu) .........................129
Menu language selection ..........................49
Menu operation keys (front panel) ............11
Menu operation keys (remote control) ......15
P
Panorama (Sound Program menu) ........ 110
Parametric EQ
(Speaker, Setup menu) ........................ 117
PARTY key ................................................ 96
Party mode ............................................... 96
Party Mode Set
(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ..................... 127
PC connection .......................................... 45
PHONES jack ........................................... 11
PHONO jack (turntable connection) ........ 43
Playback (iPod) ........................................ 77
Playback (NAS) ........................................ 83
Playback (PC) .......................................... 83
Playback (USB storage device) ............... 80
Power Amp Assign
N
NAS connection ....................................... 45
Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) .......... 67
Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) ............. 67
Network (Information menu) ................... 132
Network (Setup menu) ........................... 123
Network Attached Storage (NAS) ............ 45
Network connection ................................. 45
(Speaker, Setup menu) ........................ 114
Power cable connection ........................... 48
PRE OUT jacks ......................................... 33
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Program Service (Radio Data System) .....73
Program Type (Radio Data System) .........73
Pure Direct ................................................68
PURE DIRECT (sound mode) ...................68
Pure Direct Mode
REMOTE IN jacks ..................................... 94
REMOTE OUT jacks ................................. 47
REMOTE SENSOR
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 133
Rename
SCENE link playback ............................... 47
Scene menu ........................................... 105
Scene menu items .................................. 106
Sci-Fi (sound program) ............................ 65
Setting Data Copy
(Speaker, Setup menu) ........................ 114
Setting Pattern
(Speaker, Setup menu) ........................ 114
Setup menu ............................................ 111
Setup menu items .................................. 112
Short Message
(Display Set, Setup menu) ................... 128
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) ..................... 79
Shuffle (PC/NAS, Option menu) ............... 85
Shuffle
(USB storage device, Option menu) ...... 82
SILENT CINEMA ....................................... 64
Simple play (iPod) .................................... 78
Single measurement (YPAO) ................... 52
SLEEP key ................................................ 16
Sleep timer ............................................... 16
Sound (Setup menu) .............................. 118
Sound field effect ..................................... 64
Sound mode selection ............................. 63
Sound program ........................................ 64
Sound program category ......................... 64
Sound Program menu ............................ 108
Sound Program menu items ................... 109
Speaker (Setup menu) ........................... 114
Speaker connection ................................. 22
Speaker connection (bi-amp) .................. 32
Speaker connection (Zone2/Zone3) ........ 32
SPEAKER IMP.
(Sound, Setup menu) ............................119
(device name on the remote control) ... 139
Rename (input source name) ................ 104
Rename (network name) ........................ 124
Rename (scene name) ........................... 107
Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) ....... 107
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) .................... 79
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) ............... 85
Repeat
(USB storage device, Option menu) ...... 82
Reset (remote control) ........................... 142
Reset (Scene menu) .............................. 107
Resolution
R
Radio Data System (FM radio) ..................73
Radio Text (Radio Data System) ...............73
Rear panel (part names and functions) ....13
Rear Presence
(Configuration, Setup menu) .................116
Recital/Opera (sound program) ................65
Recording device connection ...................46
RECOV./BACKUP
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135
REMOTE CON AMP
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................133
Remote connection ...................................47
Remote control
(part names and functions) .....................15
Remote control code registration
(playback device) .................................137
Remote control code registration (TV) ....136
Remote control ID setting
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................133
(remote control) .....................................133
Remote control sensor ................................5
Remote control sensor setting
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................133
Remote control signal transmitter
(remote control) .......................................15
Remote ID
(Video Mode, Setup menu) .................. 120
Resolution Enhancement
(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 120
Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) ... 109
Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) .... 109
Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) .... 109
Roleplaying Game (sound program) ....... 65
Room Size (Sound Program menu) ........ 109
Router connection .................................... 45
S VIDEO jack ............................................ 34
Sampling
(Audio Signal, Information menu) ........ 131
Saturation (Adjustment, Setup menu) .... 121
Save (Scene menu) ................................ 106
Scene configuration ................................. 62
SCENE function ........................................ 61
SCENE key ............................................... 61
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 133
Speaker Impedance
(System, Information menu) ................. 132
(System, Information menu) ..................132
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker impedance setting
Surround decoder .................................... 67
Surround Initial Delay
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 109
Surround Liveness
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 109
Surround Room Size
(Sound Program menu) ........................ 109
S-video cable ........................................... 34
SWFR Layout
Tuning (FM/AM radio) .............................. 69
Tuning (HD Radio) ................................... 71
Turntable .................................................. 43
TV Audio Input
(HDMI Control, Setup menu) ................ 122
TV connection .......................................... 35
TV FORMAT
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134
TV Format
(System, Information menu) ................. 132
TV operation keys (remote control) .......... 15
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ....................21
Speaker indicator (front display) ...............12
Spectacle (sound program) ......................65
Sports (sound program) ............................65
Standard (sound program) .......................65
Standby indicator (front panel) .................10
Standby Sync
(HDMI Control, Setup menu) .................122
System (Information menu) .................... 132
System ID
(HDMI, Setup menu) .............................123
STEREO (sound program subcategory) ...66
Stereo pin cable ........................................34
Stereo reception mode (FM radio) ............69
STP network cable ....................................45
STRAIGHT (sound mode) .........................67
Straight decode ........................................67
Subnet Mask ...........................................123
Subnet Mask
(Network, Information menu) .................132
Subwoofer 1
(Configuration, Setup menu) .................116
Subwoofer 2
(Configuration, Setup menu) .................116
Subwoofer connection ..............................23
Subwoofer Trim (Option menu) ...............101
SUR.DECODE (sound mode) ...................67
Surround Back
(Configuration, Setup menu) .................115
Surround Back Initial Delay
(Sound Program menu) .........................109
Surround Back Liveness
U
(System, Information menu) ................. 132
USB jack ................................................... 11
USB storage device connection .............. 80
T
Target Zone
V
(Trigger Output, Setup menu) .............. 129
Temporal NR
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) ... 135
Video (Setup menu) ............................... 119
Video Adjustment (Option menu) ........... 101
VIDEO AUX jacks ..................................... 44
Video device connection .......................... 41
VIDEO jack ............................................... 34
Video Mode (Option menu) .................... 101
Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) .......... 119
Video Out (Input menu) .......................... 104
Video pin cable ........................................ 34
Video Signal (Information menu) ............ 131
Video signal type setting
(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 121
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) ......... 117
The Bottom Line (sound program) ........... 66
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) ......... 66
Tone Control (Option menu) .................... 99
Traffic information .................................... 74
Traffic Program (Option menu) ................ 74
Trigger function ........................................ 47
Trigger Mode
(Trigger Output, Setup menu) .............. 128
Trigger Output1
(Function, Setup menu) ........................ 128
Trigger Output2
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134
Village Vanguard (sound program) .......... 66
Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................. 64
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) ............... 64
VOLTAGE SELECTOR .............................. 48
Volume
(Function, Setup menu) ........................ 128
TUNER FRQ STEP
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134
Tuner Frq. Step
(Sound Program menu) .........................109
Surround Back Room Size
(Sound Program menu) .........................109
(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .... 125
Volume Interlock (Input menu) ............... 104
(System, Information menu) ................. 132
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Volume Trim (Option menu) ....................100
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) ................64
W
Wall Paper (Display Set, Setup menu) ....128
Warehouse Loft (sound program) .............66
Warning message (YPAO) ........................59
Windows Media Player ..............................83
Y
Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) .....................50
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer) ................................50
YPAO MIC jack .........................................50
YPAO microphone ....................................50
Z
Zone (Information menu) .........................132
Zone Rename
(Main Zone Set, Setup menu) ...............125
Zone Rename
(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .....126
Zone Rename
(Zone4 Set, Setup menu) ......................126
Zone Scene Rename
(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .....126
Zone Scene Rename
(Zone4 Set, Setup menu) ......................126
Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) ......125
Zone3 ........................................................90
Zone3 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) ......125
Zone4 ........................................................90
Zone4 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) ......126
APPENDIX
➤
Index
En 170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE450A0/EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Whirlpool Washer Dryer WVP8600S User Manual
Wolf Appliance Company Fryer WOLF FRYER MODULE User Manual
Woodstock Planer W1744 User Manual
Wow Wee Time Clock 8032 User Manual
XiNCOM Network Router XC DPG502 User Manual
Xingtel Xiamen Electronics Telephone XL 2031IDW User Manual
Yamaha Outboard Motor 6D6 28199 10 User Manual
Yamaha Stereo Amplifier DSP AX620 User Manual
Yamaha Stereo Receiver HTR 6090 User Manual
Zenoah Pole Saw PSZ2610 User Manual